EP1869531A1 - Method of tolerance-based trajectory planning - Google Patents

Method of tolerance-based trajectory planning

Info

Publication number
EP1869531A1
EP1869531A1 EP06748600A EP06748600A EP1869531A1 EP 1869531 A1 EP1869531 A1 EP 1869531A1 EP 06748600 A EP06748600 A EP 06748600A EP 06748600 A EP06748600 A EP 06748600A EP 1869531 A1 EP1869531 A1 EP 1869531A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
point
arc
maximum allowable
speed
motive body
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
EP06748600A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP1869531B1 (en
Inventor
Jiawei Hong
Xiaonan Tan
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Hurco Companies Inc
Original Assignee
Hurco Companies Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Hurco Companies Inc filed Critical Hurco Companies Inc
Publication of EP1869531A1 publication Critical patent/EP1869531A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of EP1869531B1 publication Critical patent/EP1869531B1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/18Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form
    • G05B19/416Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form characterised by control of velocity, acceleration or deceleration
    • G05B19/4163Adaptive control of feed or cutting velocity
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/18Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form
    • G05B19/41Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form characterised by interpolation, e.g. the computation of intermediate points between programmed end points to define the path to be followed and the rate of travel along that path
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/18Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form
    • G05B19/41Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form characterised by interpolation, e.g. the computation of intermediate points between programmed end points to define the path to be followed and the rate of travel along that path
    • G05B19/4103Digital interpolation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/18Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form
    • G05B19/416Numerical control [NC], i.e. automatically operating machines, in particular machine tools, e.g. in a manufacturing environment, so as to execute positioning, movement or co-ordinated operations by means of programme data in numerical form characterised by control of velocity, acceleration or deceleration
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/34Director, elements to supervisory
    • G05B2219/34171Generate polynomial fitting in tolerance zone around polygon
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/34Director, elements to supervisory
    • G05B2219/34175Overlap, between two blocks, continuous, smooth speed change, movement
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/43Speed, acceleration, deceleration control ADC
    • G05B2219/43057Adjust acceleration, speed until maximum allowable moment for axis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/43Speed, acceleration, deceleration control ADC
    • G05B2219/43199Safety, limitation of feedrate
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/43Speed, acceleration, deceleration control ADC
    • G05B2219/43203Limitation of speed, permissible, allowable, maximum speed
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/30Nc systems
    • G05B2219/50Machine tool, machine tool null till machine tool work handling
    • G05B2219/50179Dynamic tolerance, limit values as function of speed, type of command

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to navigation of a path by a moving object, and, more particularly, to motion control systems for computer-controllable machine tools.
  • trajectory programmers must make a trade-off between the velocity and the precision of motion along the desired trajectory. These decisions are often based on the programmer's experience and result in an iterative programming process wherein the trajectory is executed and then modified to reduce the velocity in sections where an undesirable deviation from the desired trajectory is observed. Thus, programmers control the deviation from the desired trajectory, and therefore the quality of the motion, by manipulating the tool velocity along the trajectory.
  • CNCs Computer Numerical Controllers
  • a numerical controller receives a set of coded instructions that form a part program.
  • Part programs are typically expressed in a standard G&M code language, or a close derivative of this language based on either the International Standards Organization (ISO) or the Electronics Industries Association (EIA) RS-274-D, using codes identified by letters such as G, M, or F.
  • the codes define a sequence of machining operations to control motion in the manufacture of a part.
  • the numerical controller converts the codes to a series of electrical signals which control motors attached to a machine tool effecting the motion of the tool along the programmed trajectory.
  • a motion controller operating a milling machine is one example of CNC.
  • Lathes, grinders and coordinate measuring machines. (CMMs) are other examples of manufacturing equipment which utilize a CNC for motion control.
  • a three-axis CNC milling machine has a head where a tool is mounted, and a table movable relative to the tool in the X, Y plane. Motors control motion of the table in the X and Y directions and motion of tool in the Z direction, establishing an orthogonal X, Y, Z Cartesian coordinate system.
  • Positional sensors provide feedback indicating the position of the tool with respect to the coordinate system of the milling machine.
  • the CNC reads in a part program specifying a tool path trajectory that the tool is to follow at a specified velocity or feedrate.
  • the controller continuously compares the current tool position with the specified tool path. Using this feedback, the controller generates signals to control motors in such a way that the tool's actual trajectory matches the desired tool path or trajectory as closely as possible while the tool moves along the tool path at the desired velocity.
  • the controller may be used in conjunction with a computer aided machining (CAM) system.
  • CAM computer aided machining
  • machining error The deviation of the actual tool trajectory from the desired trajectory or tool path is referred to as "machining error.”
  • the machining error may be computed as the distance between the instantaneous tool position and the desired trajectory as specified by the tool path.
  • CNC tolerance is defined as the amount of the permitted machining error while machining.
  • Motion controllers are expected to maintain good or tight CNC tolerance. The machining error depends on many factors including the performance of the motion controller and the feedrate selected for traversing the trajectory during machining. In general, higher feedrates will result in larger machining errors.
  • Known part programs do not explicitly address CNC tolerance issues. The machine tool operator, part programmer or machinist must set feedrates to attempt to address these issues.
  • tolerance cannot be expressed using known CNC programming languages, such as EIA RS-274-D, nor do existing motion controllers support the notion of constraining motion so that a CNC tolerance specification is met.
  • One of the operator's functions is to select feedrates that would result in acceptable part quality, while simultaneously achieving high metal removal rates. The selection of appropriate feedrates is based on the operator's experience, and general rules of thumb may be obtained from numerous handbooks and charts (e.g., Machinery's Handbook, 24th edition, Industrial Press Inc., New York 1992).
  • the figures from such documents while perfectly feasible when used under the correct conditions, are frequently inappropriate when applied to specific machining situations. Published figures fail to account for local machining conditions such as sudden changes in the tool path, thereby leaving optimization of the feedrate to the operator. It is difficult for an operator to select feedrate values that achieve the desired part quality while maximizing the machine tool's productivity throughout the part program.
  • a tolerance based motion control system including a method for setting feedrates based upon tolerance restraints, is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,242,880, which is incorporated herein by reference. While this patent represents a significant step forward in the art of motion control, refinements in the use of tolerance commands, E codes, and tolerance regions are needed in order to improve feedrates while still operating within the tolerance limits.
  • the present invention applies smoothing to any trajectory of a motive body.
  • the present invention may be applied to smooth the trajectory of any motive body, such as a vehicle or projectile, regardless of whether the vehicle or projectile travels by land, sea or air.
  • the method may also be applied to adjust the feedrate of a CNC machine tool based on the CNC tolerance specified by the programmer and the programmed tool path, defining the maximum allowable feedrate at each point along the programmed trajectory. This information, along with position feedback, is used to modify the feedrate along the actual trajectory of motion to limit the position deviation from the ideal programmed path so that the requested CNC tolerance can be achieved.
  • Tolerance Based Control (TBC) Technology introduces the notion of CNC Tolerance to the programming and machining environment. It effectively allows the CNC programmer to program a part by using the maximum, or near maximum, permissible feedrates for a given cutting condition, i.e. cutter, speed, depth of cut, material conditions and so forth, and specify a desired CNC Tolerance.
  • TBC Tolerance Based Control
  • the Tolerance Control may calculate feedrate limitations based on the CNC tolerance specified by the programmers and the programmed tool path, specifying the maximum, or near maximum, allowable feedrate at each point along the programmed trajectory. This information along with position feedback may be used to modify the feedrate along the actual trajectory of motion to limit position deviations from the ideally programmed path so that the requested CNC tolerance may be satisfied.
  • the TBC approach may use Predictive Control techniques, which replaces non-TBC point-to-point fixed cycle control with trajectory and velocity based motion control.
  • TBC may include looking at where the cutter tool is in relation to the programmed trajectory and adjusting accordingly, thereby eliminating the need for following error terms in the control loop.
  • TBC continually processes machine tool position feedback along with the programmed trajectory and knowledge of a machine's capabilities to instantaneously issue a control signal that is responsive to the instantaneous machining conditions.
  • a non-TBC PID control loop approximates the programmed trajectory by pulling the cutter tool from preplanned target to target using the following error, the TBC control pushes the cutter tool along the desired trajectory, correcting for deviations as they are encountered.
  • TBC control may include controlling or adjusting movements of the tool based upon the current tracked position of the tool vis-a-vis a desired tool trajectory, rather than basing future tool movements solely upon where the tool should be at a certain point in time according to a pre-planned itinerary.
  • tool motion is controlled along a trajectory that is modeled as an arcuate path without polygon approximation. That is, the tool may be commanded to follow an arcuate trajectory rather than a trajectory formed by a series of linear segments that approximate a curved trajectory.
  • TBC control may eliminate the conversion of arc trajectories into a straight-line approximation of the arc, allowing for the direct precision machining of arc segments, the elimination of the chord error, the reduction of part program size and the elimination of the processing required to convert complex trajectories into their polynomial approximations.
  • the Data Smoothing technology in TBC control may include examining a target trajectory, for example a programmed NC tool trajectory identifying NC line segments which can be smoothed, and converting these NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance.
  • Data Smoothing may include converting point-to-point linear moves into a sequence of mutually tangential arcs within allowed tolerances and with relatively small curvature changes.
  • the extent of smoothing may be dependent on the specified tolerance. This technology has the benefit of achieving smoother trajectory, smoother velocity, acceleration, better feedrate control and improved surface finish.
  • the smoothing technology is particularly important with legacy part programs expressing complex part geometry using polygon approximations.
  • the lookahead technology in TBC replaces non-TBC fixed buffer lookahead algorithms, reducing the possibility of data starvation, overshooting, tolerance breaching, dwell marks and poor surface finish on part products.
  • Lookahead may ensure enough distance to accelerate or decelerate from one speed to another.
  • the lookahead algorithm may calculate and limit the speed of that motion segment according to some motion profile, such as an S-curve speed profile.
  • lookahead is usually performed in real time and includes recursive modification of previously processed motion commands, the high efficiency of the algorithm may result in reduction of the CPU load and an improvement in machine performance.
  • the recursive modification of motions may involve only logic and addition.
  • the algorithm may have the advantage of requiring fewer iterations of modifying previous commands.
  • the algorithm may have a further advantage of improved run times which increases the system speed or throughput.
  • One option in a non-TBC Lookahead algorithm is to calculate a speed limit upon each instance of the motion distance being found insufficient to achieve a desired speed change. Such calculation of the speed limit may involve a large amount of computation. Repeatedly performing the calculation may be undesirable because of the processing time and resources required.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention may use a stop distance concept as a metric of speed limitation, which may be very computationally efficient.
  • the Soft-motion technology is the basis of the TBC control, which is easily updated and eliminates the need for costly PID based motion control cards.
  • the TBC Prototype Software System may include Win32 components and Real Time Software System (RTSS) components.
  • Win32 refers to an application program interface (API) for running 32-bit Windows applications under Windows NT and Windows XP, as is commonly known, although other interfaces may be used with other underlying operating systems.
  • Win32 Components may be interface modules for processing user requests, providing status information back to the users, updating graphics display, and converting a subset of G&M code into the required forms.
  • Win32 components may include man-machine interface components and an interpreter of a subset of G&M code.
  • the man- machine interface components may include display software and control panel processing.
  • the machine I/O software components may include drivers for the servo transducer board.
  • the Machine I/O Servo Driver may be responsible for taking the control signals generated by the TBC control and processing them into electrical signals effecting motion. This driver may also take feedback signals from the machine tool and convert them into information used by the TBC software.
  • RTSS Components may be coded within the RTSS, ensuring deterministic response.
  • the RTSS components may include TBC components, machine I/O software components, and component integration and communication components.
  • the TBC components may include tolerance understanding components, data compression components, data smoothing components, lookahead components, and motion kernel components.
  • the TBC components may be functionally divided into two groups, i.e., a TBC data preprocessing group and a TBC motion control group including TBC motion kernel.
  • the TBC data preprocessing group may include tolerance understanding components, data compression components, data smoothing components, and lookahead components.
  • the TBC data preprocessing group may be implemented in a queue module.
  • the smoothing function includes three phases: prepare for smoothing, adjust for smoothing and double arc smoothing. After the three phases of smoothing operations, point- to-point moves are converted into a sequence of mutually tangential arcs within allowed tolerance and with relatively small curvature changes.
  • the invention comprises, in one form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying three consecutive points of the path data.
  • a first distance between a circular arc defined by the three points and a middle portion of a first line extending between a first of the points and a second of the points is ascertained.
  • a second distance between the circular arc and a middle portion of a second line extending between the second point and a third of the points is ascertained.
  • a turn angle between the first line and the second line is determined. Smoothing is performed on the second point if the first distance and/or the second distance is less than a threshold line distance, and the turn angle is greater than a threshold angle.
  • the invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of adjusting path data of a motive body, including identifying four consecutive points of the path data.
  • the four consecutive points include a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point. It is determined whether the second point is suitable for smoothing. If the second point is suitable for smoothing, then a first arc and a second arc are located, and the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc.
  • the first arc is defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point.
  • the second arc is defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point.
  • a line move associated with the second point is replaced with at least one arc move associated with the second point.
  • the invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying four consecutive points of the path data.
  • the four consecutive points include a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point.
  • a first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point is located.
  • a second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point is located.
  • the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc.
  • the invention comprises, in a further form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying a line move extending from a first point of the path data to a second point of the path data.
  • the line move is replaced with a first arc move and a second arc move.
  • the first arc move begins at the first point and terminates at a junction point.
  • the second arc move begins at the junction point and terminates at the second point.
  • the invention comprises, in still another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a motive body such as a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path, and determining a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points.
  • a last maximum allowable speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained.
  • An other maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established.
  • the invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path, and establishing a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual tool path from the target tool path.
  • a degree of curvature of the target tool path at a plurality of locations along the target tool path is ascertained.
  • a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at each of the points along the target tool path is determined, wherein the maximum allowable tolerance speed is dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and the degree of curvature.
  • a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined.
  • the invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path. Each selected two of the points being separated by a respective segment length. A maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined.
  • the invention comprises, in a further form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including identifying a target tool path.
  • the tool is commanded to follow the target tool path from an initial position.
  • a first actual position of the tool is sensed after the commanding step.
  • a first target tool subpath from the first actual position is calculated to correct for predictive errors in movement of the tool.
  • the invention comprises, in still another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including empirically determining predictive errors in movement of the tool. Actual movements of the tool are monitored. The actual movements of the tool are controlled dependent upon the empirically determined predictive errors and random errors in the actual movements of the tool.
  • the invention comprises, in a still further form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool having a plurality of sequential movements, including sensing an actual position of the tool after a first of the movements of the tool.
  • a target position of the tool is calculated based on the sensing step.
  • the target position is calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of the tool.
  • the sensing and calculating steps are repeated for other ones of the movements of the tool.
  • the invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including sensing an actual position of the tool.
  • a position error between the actual position of the tool and a desired position of the tool is calculated.
  • the position error is compared to a specified error tolerance.
  • a speed of the tool is adjusted dependent upon the comparing step.
  • the invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including sensing an actual position of the tool along each of a plurality of axes. A multi-dimensional position error between the actual position of the tool in each of the axes and a multi-dimensional reference trajectory is calculated. A multi-dimensional position error signal is produced dependent upon the calculating step. A speed and/or a direction of the tool are controlled dependent upon the multi-dimensional position error signal.
  • An advantage of the present invention is that it provides improved trajectories or tool paths for the machine tool. More particularly, the tool paths are smoother, thereby permitting higher feedrates and providing smoother surfaces on the work piece.
  • Figure 1 is a flow chart of one embodiment of a tolerance based control method of the present invention.
  • Figure 2 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a tolerance based control system of the present invention.
  • Figure 3a is a diagram illustrating the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space.
  • Figure 3b is a diagram illustrating a first case of another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space.
  • Figure 3 c is a diagram illustrating a second case of another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space.
  • Figure 3d is a diagram illustrating yet another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space in the case of an arc.
  • Figure 4a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of data compression according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 4b is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of data compression according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of selecting data points for data smoothing according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5b is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of selecting data points for data smoothing according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 6a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of adjusting line moves for smoothing according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 6b is a perspective view of a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of adjusting line moves for smoothing according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 7 is an enlarged plot of the middle two points of Figure 6a.
  • Figure 8 is a plot of the program data points of Figure 6a along with one subsequent program data point, illustrating a next step of the method of Figure 6a for adjusting line moves for smoothing.
  • Figure 9 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of smoothing data using a double arc algorithm according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 10 is a plot of the tool velocity versus time, also referred to as the S-Curve.
  • Figure 11 is a plot of a segment length extending between two consecutive points along a tool path.
  • Figure 12 is a plot illustrating the deviations of an actual tool path from a desired tool path.
  • Figure 13 is a plot of control loop cycle time for the servo signals in one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 14 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of predictive error correction according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 15 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of random error correction according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 16 is a flow chart illustrating a method of the present invention for executing a motion kernel.
  • Figure 17 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a machine of the present invention for machining a work piece.
  • Figure 18 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 5.
  • Figure 19 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figures 6 and 7.
  • Figure 20 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 9.
  • Figure 21 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figures 5 through 9.
  • Figure 22 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
  • Figure 23 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
  • Figure 24 is a flow chart of yet another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
  • Figure 25 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
  • Figure 26 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
  • Figure 27 is a flow chart of yet another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
  • Figure 28a is a graphical representation of Level 0 data smoothing.
  • Figure 28b is a graphical representation of Level 1 data smoothing.
  • Figure 28c is a graphical representation of Level 2 data smoothing.
  • Figure 28d is a graphical representation of Level 3 data smoothing.
  • Figure 28e is a graphical representation of Level 4 data smoothing.
  • Figure 29 is a plot illustrating one step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention.
  • Figure 30 is a plot illustrating another step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention.
  • Figure 31 is a plot illustrating yet another step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention.
  • Figure 32a is another plot of the tool velocity versus time, also referred to as an S-
  • Figure 32b is a diagram indicating how distances are related to the plot of Figure
  • Figure 33 is a diagram illustrating the concept of stop distance.
  • Figure 34 is yet another plot of the tool velocity versus time for both additive and non-additive lookahead algorithms.
  • Figure 35a is a flow chart of one embodiment of an additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention.
  • Figure 35b is a flow chart of one embodiment of a non-additive lookahead algorithm.
  • Figure 36 is a table comparing the kinematic characteristics of a non-additive lookahead algorithm and a TBC additive lookahead algorithm.
  • Figure 37 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a non-TBC motion control arrangement of the present invention.
  • Figure 38d is a plot of actual trajectories resulting from the reference trajectories of
  • Figure 39 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a TBC motion control arrangement of the present invention.
  • Figure 40 is another block diagram of the TBC motion control arrangement of
  • Figure 39 is a plot illustrating the calculation of the stopper plane normal direction for line motion.
  • Figure 42 is a plot illustrating the calculation of the stopper plane normal direction for arc motion.
  • Figure 43 is a plot illustrating line motion geometry analysis.
  • Figure 44a is a first plot illustrating arc motion geometry analysis.
  • Figure 44b is a second plot illustrating arc motion geometry analysis.
  • Figure 45 is a flow chart illustrating operation of one embodiment of a TBC S-
  • Figure 46 is a block diagram illustrating one embodiment of a TBC feed forward control arrangement of the present invention.
  • Figure 47 is a block diagram illustrating one embodiment of an arrangement of the present invention for variable-gain feedback control of normal error.
  • a tolerance based control method 100 of the present invention including the performance of the major functions of a tolerance based controller of the present invention as it machines the part defined by the part program. While the controller of this disclosed embodiment relates to a particular case of the present invention, dealing with CNC machine controls, the invention may be generally applied to motive bodies having various motion control situations as one of skill in the art would recognize, such as robotic control, vehicular control, projectile control, and the like.
  • a first step 102 the controller receives part data from the part program.
  • the part program may include data specifying the dimensions, shape, and other physical characteristics of the part or "work piece" to be machined.
  • a trajectory preprocessing step 104 includes calculating a desired tool path and feedrates that the machine tool should follow in order to produce the part within a relatively short period of time and within dimensional tolerance constraints.
  • position feedback specifying the actual position of the machine tool is used in a predictive and random error compensation step 106 to modify servo commands to redirect the machine tool to compensate for, i.e., correct, both predictive or repeatable errors and random or non- repeatable errors in the actual machine tool path as compared to the commanded tool path.
  • the modified servo command is transmitted to the servo amplifier for use in actuating the machine tool.
  • steps 102 and 104 correspond to the Queue Manager Task of Figure 2
  • steps 106 and 108 correspond to the Run System Task of Figure 2.
  • the part program may provide the locations of discrete points on the surface of the part, and the Numerical Control may interpolate between these discrete points to thereby define a desired trajectory or tool path formed of contiguous lines and arcs.
  • the term "arc" may indicate a segment of a circle. That is, the arc may have a constant radius.
  • the quality of the data in the user part program may be directly linked to the quality of the cutting results on a machine tool. Data of poor quality often results in a part surface that is not smooth.
  • the Queue Manager Task preprocesses the part program motion data with four consecutive operations that transform it into high quality motion data before the Run System Task executes it.
  • the four operations are Tolerance Understanding within Tolerance Queue 202, Data Compression within Compression Queue 204, Data Smoothing within Smoothing Queue 206, and Additive Lookahead within Lookahead Queue 208.
  • the queue manager may perform the corresponding data processing on each queue and move the data flow through the consecutive queues in a pipeline manner.
  • the data processing includes the tolerance understanding operation on the tolerance queue, the data compressing operation on the compression queue, the smoothing operation on the smoothing queue, and the lookahead operation on the lookahead queue.
  • the queue module may preprocess NC motion commands such as positioning (GOO), line (GOl), arc (G02, G03), and an NC tolerance command E used for the tolerance based control.
  • NC motion commands such as positioning (GOO), line (GOl), arc (G02, G03), and an NC tolerance command E used for the tolerance based control.
  • TBC technology is consistent with existing or legacy CNC part programs. This technology allows the operator to specify NC tolerance commands along with the existing NC commands for execution. By inserting a new NC Tolerance Command within an existing G&M code part program, the CNC programmer can specify different CNC Tolerance constraints.
  • NC tolerance commands specify a region and a tolerance value to be applied to that region along with a command identification number.
  • An NC tolerance command is defined as an E code:
  • An E code requests that a three-dimensional rectangular region defined by the coordinates of the diagonal corners (xl, yl, zl) and (x2, y2, z2), xl ⁇ x2, yl ⁇ y2, zl ⁇ z2, hold a non-zero NC tolerance value of tol.
  • This specific tolerance command may be identified by an integer value id.
  • NC tolerance value at the point is defined as the tolerance value specified in the latest E code whose region covers this point.
  • tolerance mapping operation within tolerance queue 202, tolerance values are assigned to each line or arc within the tool path.
  • the tolerance mapping operation processes variable tolerance regions that are defined in the part program and assigns the required tolerances to each motion move. Tolerance regions having different values may overlap one another, as shown in Figure 3a.
  • Three areas 302, 304, 306 have respective tolerances specified as 0.001 inch, 0.0005 inch, and 0.0003 inch. As a move such as from P 0 to Pj crosses multiple tolerance regions, the move is split into multiple moves, i.e., from P 0 to Pi', from Pi' to Pi", and from Pj" to Pi, with each move having a different tolerance value.
  • the tolerance command E codes in a part program may specify regions and tolerance values to be applied to those regions in the part.
  • the motion commands in the part program may fall into different tolerance regions.
  • Tolerance understanding may identify the correct tolerance value required for each motion command according to the programmed E codes.
  • a tolerance command In processing a tolerance command, if the command is a new tolerance specification, a space may be created for a new item in a tolerance table. In the tolerance table, tolerance values are mapped to respective tolerance regions. Then, the new item may be filled in with the tolerance specification extracted from the command. Finally, the new item may be inserted at the beginning of the tolerance table. After being processed, a tolerance command may be discarded, because the information from the command has been stored in the tolerance table.
  • the required tolerance value for the command may be calculated and attached to the command.
  • the E codes may specify different tolerance regions, and each line or arc of the NC program may belong to one or more of these tolerance regions.
  • the algorithm for determining the required tolerance for each line or arc may include checking the tolerance of some sample points on the line or arc. If a line or arc lies in one tolerance region, the sample points will have the same tolerance, which will be the required tolerance for this line or arc. On the other hand, if a line or arc lies across more than one tolerance region, the sample points will have different tolerances. In this case, the line will be divided into segments based on the sample points, with each line segment having a unique required tolerance. By the same token, an arc may be segmented by different tolerances, however, the arc will not be divided. The tightest tolerance value will be chosen as the required tolerance for this arc instead.
  • a routine may be used to determine the required tolerance for a given point. It performs the following operations: 1) take the position of the given point as a key value; 2) starting from the beginning, search the tolerance table for the E code whose tolerance region covers the key value (i.e., the given point is located within the tolerance region); and 3) assign the tolerance value of the E code first found as the required tolerance for the given point.
  • the latest tolerance command is in control.
  • a new tolerance command is always inserted at the beginning of the tolerance table. Therefore, in the above operation, the first found E code is the latest E code which specifies the required tolerance for the given point.
  • Another routine may be used to divide a line into segments according to multiple tolerance specifications. Yet another routine may be used to determine the tightest tolerance among the multiple tolerance specifications on an arc.
  • FIG. 3b-c Another embodiment of tolerance regions having different values and overlapping one another is illustrated in Figures 3b-c, Figure 3b illustrating a first case, and Figure 3 c illustrating a second case.
  • a line move may be divided into at most two lines. Only one more point, point p', is generated between points p0 and pi.
  • Al.tol min ⁇ tl, t2, t3, t4, t5 ⁇ .
  • the elements to be taken from tolerance queue 202 and sent to compression queue 204 are: positioning commands, line commands with required tolerance attached, arc commands with required tolerance attached, and the program end command.
  • a line command is a point-to-point move.
  • Combining short line moves into a longer one may include determining a starting point and an end point among the target point sequence for a new line move and removing all the intermediate points.
  • the new, longer line move can replace the old short line moves only if some conditions are met, including the tolerance condition, i.e., the distance from each of the removed points to the new line is within a given tolerance.
  • all line commands may be sequentially examined in compression queue 204.
  • the compression operation may process point-to-point moves in the following steps: 1) examine a sequence of point-to-point moves with the consecutive target points p 0 , pi, p 2 , p 3 , ... , p n- i, p n ; and 2) remove the points between po andp n in the sequence, i.e., pi, p 2 , p 3 , ... , p n- i, if the following conditions are all met:
  • the distance from p 0 to p n is bounded by a predetermined length [00120]
  • the line move from po to p n replaces n shorter line moves.
  • the elements in compression queue 204 may be more compact since some consecutive short lines have merged. All the elements in compression queue 204, including positioning commands, compressed line commands, arc commands, and the program end command, are sent to smoothing queue 206.
  • Test 2 For p3, the angle ⁇ is between -90 degrees and 90 degrees.
  • Test 4 The perpendicular distances from pi, p2 and p3 to the line p ⁇ p4 are less than the specified tolerance.
  • p4 is added to the compression queue. If the above four tests are not satisfied, then p3 is added to the smoothing queue and pi and p2 are discarded in compression. Essentially, three segments (pOpl, plp2 and p2p3) are combined into one segment (p ⁇ p3).
  • Data smoothing operations convert NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance.
  • the data smoothing may advantageously result in smoother velocity and acceleration, better control of feedrates, improved surface finish, and full utilization of the TBC true arc technology.
  • Level 0 including no smoothing and producing a cut polygon
  • Level 1 in which arcs replace lines, and arcs may not be connected to each other in most cases
  • Level 2 in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, and arcs are not tangential to each other in most cases
  • Level 3 in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, and arcs are tangential to each other
  • Level 4 (a smoothing level that may be provided by the present invention), in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, arcs are tangential to each other, and arc curvatures change gradually.
  • the preparatory smoothing operation, the corrective smoothing operation, and the double arc smoothing may be performed on the smoothing queue simultaneously and in a pipeline manner.
  • Figures 28a-e illustrate level 0, level 1, level 2, level 3, and level 4 smoothing, respectively.
  • level 0-3 smoothing the output of smoothing, the final trajectory, always passes through the data points.
  • cl and rl are the center and radius of the arc defined by the points p ⁇ , pi and p2; and c2 and r2 are the center and radius of the arc defined by the points p2, p3 and p4.
  • the curvature of an arc is defined as the inverse of the radius (1/r).
  • the relatively large radius change from rl to r2 results in a correspondingly large curvature change between the two arcs.
  • Level 4 is different from the other smoothing levels in the sense that the data points are adjusted (within the specified tolerance) to achieve gradual curvature changes.
  • This adjustment of the data points is acceptable in applications such as the multi-axis contouring (or metal cutting using CNC machines) because the adjustments are very small (typically less than 0.0005 inch) and are within a specified tolerance.
  • the points may be adjusted, both in direction and magnitude, to achieve gradual curvature changes such that the trajectory approaches being elliptical. Gradual change of curvature along the trajectory may facilitate motion control. Gradual change of curvature may be characterized by the curvature changing, or at least possibly changing, after each point along the trajectory.
  • the radius of curvature becomes incrementally smaller along the trajectory from p0 to p4. That is, the radii become smaller with each point along the trajectory.
  • the radius of curvature drops in one large step as the trajectory passes through p2.
  • the points may be adjusted or moved such that the trajectory approaches an elliptical path. However, the points may be adjusted only within a specified tolerance.
  • centripetal force directed toward the center of the arc.
  • this force may be provided by the motors. Sudden and relatively large changes in the centripetal forces (as the motion moves from one arc to the next) may result in larger overshoots, which may be detrimental to the resulting surface finish.
  • Figure 28e illustrates minor adjustments to the positions of points p0 to p4 as compared to their earlier positions as shown in Figure 28d.
  • the minor adjustments may result in the points defining a trajectory that approaches being elliptical.
  • An elliptical trajectory may be ideal or optimal because, along an ellipse, the curvature changes continuously.
  • how large an adjustment, or much of an adjustment, that is allowed within the scope of the invention may depend upon the tolerance. Thus, the points may not actually fall on an ellipse after the adjustments.
  • a sub-optimal solution is employed such that the trajectory includes only circular arcs as opposed to being elliptical. Defining the trajectory as a series of circular arcs may have the advantage of reducing the computational/mathematical complexity of calculating the point adjustments. Thus, even if it is possible to achieve an elliptical trajectory by adjusting the points within tolerances, the points are instead adjusted such that the trajectory is defined by a series of circular arcs in one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the motion control is implemented in a 200 usec loop, i.e., the motion control is updated every 200 usec.
  • Data smoothing may include three phases or operations, namely preparing for smoothing, adjusting for smoothing, and smoothing using a double arc algorithm.
  • a first operation of a smoothing method of the present invention line data is identified for smoothing. It is not always feasible to convert NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance, as with, for example, connected lines with sharp angles. It is sometimes not desirable to smooth NC line data, for example, long line moves. Certain conditions may need to be satisfied before raw line data can be smoothed.
  • the first operation examines the original line data identifying the line segments, which meet the conditions for smoothing.
  • the point p 2 may be tagged as "no smoothing".
  • the line elements in smoothing queue 206 processed by the first operation may be all tagged.
  • the length from pi to p 2 and the length from p 2 to p 3 are both bounded by a constant of approximately between 1 cm and 2 cm; the perpendicular distance from pi to line p 2 p 3 is bounded by a constant of approximately between 20% and 40% of the length from p 2 to p 3 ; the perpendicular distance from p 3 to line pip 2 is bounded by a constant of approximately between 20% and 40% of the length from pi to p 2 ; and the angle between line pip 2 and p 2 p 3 is bounded by a constant approximately between 135° and 165°.
  • smoothing preparation step 210 includes identifying data points for smoothing. As illustrated in Figure 5a, point Pi may be suitable for smoothing, and thus may be marked for smoothing, if the length of the moves P 0 to P 1 and Pi to P 2 , and an angle 502 between these moves, are below specified limits.
  • a maximum distance that point P 0 can be disposed from point P 1 while keeping the length of the move P 0 to P 1 below specified limits is indicated by dashed line 504.
  • a maximum distance that point P 2 can be disposed from point Pi while keeping the length of the move Pi to P 2 below specified limits is indicated by dashed line 506.
  • the distance from Pi indicated by dashed line 504 is smaller than the distance from P 1 indicated by dashed line 506, these distances may be equal.
  • point Pi may be suitable for smoothing if the length of the moves Po to P 1 and P 1 to P 2 , i.e., the first line distance between points P 0 and P 1 and the second line distance between points Pj to P 2 , are both below a limit or threshold line distance of approximately between one centimeter and two centimeters, and turn angle 502 is above a limit or threshold angle approximately between 135° and 165°.
  • a further requirement for marking point Pi for smoothing is that the perpendicular distance from point Po to line PiP 2 , and the perpendicular distance from point P 2 to line P 0 Pi, are below specified limits or threshold perpendicular distances.
  • point Pi may be marked for smoothing if the perpendicular distance d 0 from point P 0 to line P 1 P 2 is less than approximately between 20% and 40% of the length of line PiP 2 , and if the perpendicular distance d 2 from point P 2 to line PoPi is less than approximately between 20% and 40% of the length of line PoPi.
  • a distance dl is the shortest distance between a middle portion of line segment pOpl and the arc p ⁇ plp2; and a distance d2 is the shortest distance between the middle portion of line segment plp2 and the arc p ⁇ plp2.
  • distance dl is the shortest distance between a midpoint of line segment pOpl and the arc p ⁇ pl ⁇ 2; and a distance d2 is the shortest distance between the midpoint of line segment plp2 and the arc p ⁇ plp2.
  • a middle one of the three points, i.e., point pi may be marked for smoothing if the following three conditions or criteria are satisfied:
  • Test 1 Both pOpl and plp2 are lines.
  • Test 2 Max ⁇ dl,d2 ⁇ ⁇ 0.0005 inch. That is, both dl and d2 are less than some predetermined distance approximately between 0.0002 and 0.001 inch, such as 0.0005 inch.
  • Test 3 The angle ⁇ > 145 degrees, or some other predetermined angle approximately between 130 degrees and 160 degrees.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a method 1800 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 5b.
  • a first step 1802 three consecutive points of a data path are identified. For example, points p ⁇ , pi and p2 may be identified.
  • a first line distance between a first of the points and a second of the points and/or a second line distance between the second point and a third of the points are ascertained. More particularly, a first line distance 518 between points pO and pi, and a second line distance 520 between points pi and p2 is ascertained.
  • a turn angle between a first line extending between the first point and the second point and a second line extending between the second point and the third point is determined.
  • a turn angle ⁇ between the line extending between points pO and pi and the line extending between points pi and p2 is determined.
  • smoothing is performed on the second point if the first line distance and/or the second line distance is less than a threshold line distance, and the turn angle is greater than a threshold turn angle. That is, smoothing may be performed on point pi if first line distance 518 and/or second line distance 520 is less than a threshold line distance, and turn angle ⁇ is greater than a threshold turn angle.
  • another three consecutive data points of the data path may be identified, as indicated in step 1802. For example, consecutive points pi, p2 and a next point p3 (not shown) may be identified.
  • a second operation line data is adjusted for smoothing.
  • the second operation may reduce the curvature changes on a three-dimensional curve represented by a sequence of three-dimensional points.
  • the local curvature at a given point on such a curve is mainly determined by neighboring points.
  • a minor change of the position of the given point or of its neighboring points may significantly change the local curvature.
  • it is possible to modify the positions of points within the given tolerance such that the curvature changes on the three-dimensional curve represented by the modified points will be reduced.
  • the smaller the curvature changes on the curve the smoother the curve may be.
  • the second operation may include sequentially checking a group of four consecutive line target points already processed by the first operation in smoothing queue 206 and adjusting the positions of middle points to modify the local curvature.
  • the algorithm for adjusting point positions as illustrated in Figure 6 may include the following steps: 1) create an arc ARCi 34 passing through points pi, p 3 and p 4 ; 2) create an arc ARC 124 passing through points pi, p 2 and p 4 ; 3) move point p 2 towards arc ARC 134 and keep the moving distance within the given tolerance; and 4) move point p 3 towards arc ARCj 24 and keep the moving distance within the given tolerance.
  • the positional adjustment proceeds continuously with groups of four consecutive points.
  • the successive group that consists of the last three points in the previous group and a new target point of the next line element will be processed.
  • the target points of line elements in smoothing queue 206 processed by the second operation are moved (within the given tolerance range) so that the curvatures at these points change more smoothly, i.e., less drastically, than they did before the second operation.
  • Step 212 includes adjusting line moves for smoothing.
  • the line moves may be adjusted relative to each other to control the path curvature and to prepare for arc fitting.
  • two construction arcs 602, 604 are located that pass through points P 0 PiP 3 and P 0 P 2 P 3 , respectively.
  • Points Pi and P2 may both be moved into an area between construction arcs 602, 604.
  • Points Pi and P 2 are moved closer to one another such that point P 2 is moved approximately midway between construction arcs 602, 604, and point Pi is moved a lesser distance toward construction arc 604. That is, point Pi may not be moved so far as to be positioned midway between construction arcs 602, 604.
  • point Pi may be moved less than half of the distance to the opposite construction arc 604. More particularly, point P 1 may be moved a distance equal to a factor between 0 and 0.5 multiplied by a spacing Si ( Figure 7) between the point P 1 and the opposite construction arc 604. The factor may be less than 0.45. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 6a, the factor is approximately between 0.18 and 0.20, which has been established mathematically as providing favorable results.
  • Figure 7 is an enlarged view that illustrates with more precision the direction and distance of the movement of points Pj and P 2 in one embodiment.
  • a line 702 intersects point P 2 and is tangent to arc 604 at point P 2 .
  • a spacing S 2 is defined between point P 2 and arc 602 in a direction perpendicular to line 702.
  • Point P 2 may be moved a distance equal to a factor between 0.45 and 0.55 multiplied by spacing S 2 in a direction perpendicular to line 702. In the embodiment illustrated in Figures 6a and 7, the factor is approximately 0.50.
  • a line 704 intersects point P 1 and is tangent to arc 602 at point P 1 -
  • a spacing S 1 is defined between point P 1 and arc 604 in a direction perpendicular to line 704.
  • Point Pi may be moved a distance of approximately 0.19 multiplied times spacing Si in a direction perpendicular to line 704.
  • Figure 8 illustrates a repetition of the process after a next point P 4 has been identified.
  • Two construction arcs 802, 804 are defined that pass through points PiP 2 P 4 and PiP 3 P 4 , respectively.
  • Points P 2 and P 3 are then moved by factors of 0.19 and 0.50, respectively, in a manner substantially similar to the movements of points P 1 and P 2 in Figures 6a and 7.
  • Figure 6b illustrates another embodiment of the present invention for adjusting line moves for smoothing. The line moves may be adjusted relative to each other to control the path curvature and to prepare for arc fitting.
  • Two construction arcs 612, 614 which are not coplanar, are located that pass through points P 0 PiP 3 and P 0 P 2 P 3 , respectively.
  • a line of intersection of the planes of arcs 612, 614 is designated 616.
  • the center of a circle defined by arc 612 is designated c2; and the center of a circle defined by arc 614 is designated cl.
  • a projection of point pi on the plane of arc 614 is designated point ql. That is, a line that extends through both of points pi and ql is perpendicular to the plane of arc 614.
  • a projection of point p2 on the plane of arc 612 is designated point q2.
  • a line that extends through both of points p2 and q2 is perpendicular to the plane of arc 612.
  • the closest point on arc 614 to point pi is designated si; and the closest point on arc 612 to point p2 is designated s2.
  • a point is adjusted if both that point and an adjacent point have been marked for smoothing.
  • a point may be marked for smoothing if it satisfies each of the three tests or conditions given above, i.e., both pOpl and plp2 are lines; Max ⁇ dl,d2 ⁇ ⁇ 0.0005 inch; and angle ⁇ > 143.2 degrees.
  • point pi may be adjusted if pi has been marked for smoothing and either or both of p0 and p2 has been marked for smoothing. Point pi may be adjusted, if at all, along an adjustment vector vl extending from pi to si.
  • point p2 may be adjusted if p2 has been marked for smoothing and either or both of pi and p3 has been marked for smoothing. Point p2 may be adjusted, if at all, along an adjustment vector v2 extending from p2 to s2.
  • the process continues with subsequent adjustments associated with arcs formed by the next set of four points, i.e., points pi, p2, p3 and p4. That is, adjustments may be made based upon an arc defined by points pi, p2 and p4 and an arc defined by points pi, p3 and p4.
  • the adjustment process may continue indefinitely with calculations based upon subsequent sets of four points along the trajectory.
  • Adjustment factors of 0.19 and 0.5 are discussed above in conjunction with the embodiment of Figure 6b. However, as with the embodiment of Figures 6a and 7, these factors may lie within respective ranges of 0.18 to 0.20 and 0.45 to 0.55.
  • the total magnitude of the adjustment of a point may be limited by a constant value. In one embodiment, the total distance of adjustment is limited to 0.0002 inch. If the calculated total adjustment is greater than 0.0002 inch, then the actual implemented adjustment is set to 0.0002 inch in the direction of the calculated adjustment. [00153] To better illustrate the embodiment of Fig. 6b, various adjustment scenarios are described below. The check to verify that the total adjustment is less than an adjustment limit, such as 0.0002 inch, is omitted for simplicity and ease of illustration.
  • p0 is not marked for smoothing
  • pi, p2 and p3 are marked for smoothing
  • p4 is not marked for smoothing.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a method 1900 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 6b which represents a trajectory path of a motive body.
  • a first step 1902 four consecutive points of a data path, including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point, are identified. For example, points p ⁇ , pi, p2 and p3 may be identified.
  • a first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point is located.
  • a first arc 612 defined by points p ⁇ , pi and p3 is identified.
  • a second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point is located.
  • a second arc 614 defined by points p ⁇ , p2 and p3 is identified.
  • the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc.
  • point pi may be moved along adjustment vector vl into an area between arcs 612 and 614.
  • Step 214 includes smoothing data using a double arc algorithm.
  • Line moves may be converted into two arc moves that are tangent to each other and that maintain a given path tolerance.
  • a line move associated with points P 0 and Pi may be replaced with two arc moves associated with points P 0 and P 1 .
  • a line move 902 from point P 0 to point Pi may be converted into Arci from P 0 to arc junction point P' and Arc 2 from arc junction point P' to Pi.
  • Arci and Arc 2 may be connected to each other and may be tangent to each other at point P'.
  • Arci may be tangent to a preceding move 904 which terminates at point P 0 .
  • Preceding move 904 may be a line move or an arc move.
  • Arc 2 may be tangent to a succeeding or next move 906 which begins at point P 1 .
  • Succeeding move 906 may be a line move or an arc move, and may be defined after the adjusted position of the next point P 2 (not shown in Figure 9) is determined. Smooth transitions between all the program moves are thus enabled.
  • a radius 908 of Arci is different from a radius 910 of Area- Radii 908 and 910 are shown only partially in Figure 9. Data smoothing essentially smoothes out abrupt turns or discontinuities in the tool path to provide a smoother tool motion.
  • Figure 20 illustrates a method 2000 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 9.
  • a line move extending from a first point of the data path to a second point of the data path is identified.
  • line move 902 extending from point P 0 to point Pj may be identified.
  • the line move is replaced with a first arc move and a second arc move, the first arc move beginning at the first point and terminating at a junction point, the second arc move beginning at the junction point and terminating at the second point.
  • line move 902 is replaced with arc moves Arci and Arc2, Arci beginning at point P 0 and terminating at junction point P', and Arc 2 beginning at junction point P 1 and terminating at second point P 1 .
  • a third operation smoothing is performed using a double arc algorithm.
  • the third operation may include converting the lines into arcs, which are mutually tangent to each other, while maintaining a given tolerance.
  • This third operation may include sequentially checking consecutive line target points processed in the second operation in smoothing queue 206 and performing the conversion of lines to arcs.
  • the double arc algorithm is developed for the third operation. This algorithm causes the final smoothed trajectory to pass through all the target points of the line segments to be smoothed. Thus, the tolerance requirements will be well satisfied.
  • the double arc algorithm may perform two functions simultaneously in a pipeline manner. First, the algorithm may determine a tangent vector at each target point of a line segment to be smoothed.
  • the algorithm may generate double arcs to replace the line segments to be smoothed.
  • the first function may perform the following steps:
  • the above function will create a sequence of desired tangent vectors at the target points of the line segments to be smoothed, denoted as ti, t 2 , t 3 , t 4 , t 5 , t 6 , .... , t n .
  • the tangent vectors may be referred to as “desired tangent vectors" because the direction changes of these vectors are gradual, which further smoothes the curvature changes in the smoothed trajectory.
  • the second function may perform the following steps:
  • the second function may perform the following steps:
  • FIG. 30 The operation of the second function in the embodiment described above is illustrated in Figures 30 and 31.
  • p ⁇ , pi and p2 are marked for smoothing.
  • a pair of three-dimensional arcs al and a2 are created such that arc al starts at point p0 and is tangent to tangent vector t ⁇ ; arc al is tangent to arc a2 at a point p' between p0 and p2; and arc a2 starts at point p', ends at point p2, and is tangent to the tangent vector t2. If a distance d between pi and the closer arc al of the two arcs is within a given or predetermined tolerance, then the double arcs al and a2 are valid.
  • the above-described second function may be repeated for the next three points along the trajectory, i.e., points p2, p3 and p4. Further, the second function may be repeated for each subsequent set of three points along the trajectory.
  • Double arcs i.e., arc al from p0 to p 1 and arc a2 from p 1 to p2, which are tangential at point p 1 may be generated from (p ⁇ , p2, t ⁇ , t2), as shown in Figure 30.
  • the shortest distance between pi and the closer of the two double arcs may then be checked. If the distances in the x, y and z directions are less than a predetermined distance, such as 0.0002 inch, then the double arcs al and a2 are valid.
  • double arcs al and a2 are invalid, then double arcs a3 and a4 are generated between points p0 and pi and based upon tangent vectors t ⁇ , tl.
  • the two arcs al and a2 may be tangential at point p".
  • a distance d in Figure 31 is the shortest distance between point p" and a line extending between points pO and pi. If distance d is less than a predetermined distance, such as 0.0005 inch, then the double arcs a3 and a4 are valid. Otherwise, if the double arcs a3 and a4 are invalid, then define the trajectory between points pO, pi as a line extending between points pO and pl.
  • the double arc algorithm replaces a line segment with a pair of three-dimensional arcs. Adjacent arcs created by the double arc algorithm may be tangent to each other, and all arcs may have reduced curvature changes.
  • the double arc algorithm may be especially suitable for use in conjunction with TBC, which would yield several advantages. First, for most three-dimensional surfaces and curves, the curvature constantly changes. Mutually tangent shorter arcs provide better and smoother approximation than longer arcs. Second, for five or six axes machining, short three-dimensional XYZ arcs can coordinate with point- to-point moves in ABC axis space.
  • Figure 21 illustrates a method 2100 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figures 5b, 6b, 30 and 31.
  • a first step 2102 four consecutive points of the path data, including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point, are identified.
  • four consecutive points p ⁇ , pi, p2 and ⁇ 3 are identified.
  • a second step 2104 it is determined whether the second point is suitable for smoothing. For example, it may be determined, according to the method described above with reference to Figure 5b, whether point pi is suitable for smoothing. If not, operation may return to step 2102 wherein another set of four consecutive points is identified.
  • a first arc defined by the first point, second point, and fourth point is located (step 2106).
  • arc 612 is identified.
  • a second arc defined by the first point, third point, and fourth point is located.
  • arc 614 is identified.
  • the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc.
  • point pi may be moved along adjustment vector vl into an area between arcs 612 and 614.
  • a line move associated with the second point may be replaced with at least one arc move associated with the second point.
  • a line move leading into point pi, or a line move originating from point pi may be replaced with an arc move, as illustrated in Figures 30 and 31.
  • a stop distance is computed that defines the distance required to decelerate the axes to zero velocity according to S-curve acceleration. It is referred to as S-Curve because the acceleration/deceleration part of the velocity profile (velocity plotted versus time) illustrated in Figure 10 looks like an "S" instead of a straight line.
  • the stop distance may be determined by the lower of: a) the maximum move velocity determined by the angle between the current and next moves; and b) the maximum move velocity for the path curvature determined by the machine model.
  • the Lookahead operation may ensure enough distance to accelerate or decelerate between all velocity changes. This has advantages in that the machine bumping and dwell marks may be reduced, and the surface finish in machining may be improved.
  • the additive lookahead function may include searching in lookahead queue 208 for velocity and distance information and determining whether there is enough distance for the machine to accelerate/decelerate properly from one motion command to the next. If there is not enough distance, then the information may be stored and used in the motion kernel to reduce the velocity so that the machine may accelerate/decelerate properly.
  • the proper velocity may be calculated from the stop distance and the S-Curve, as discussed in more detail below.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm may require knowledge of the maximum velocities allowed for different part geometries.
  • a tolerance/arc radius/velocity table may be built for this purpose. The table may provide the maximum allowable velocities for arcs of different radii or curvatures with different tolerance requirements.
  • the additive lookahead function may check each newly coming motion command at the head of lookahead queue 208 and calculate the stop distance for the previous command in the following steps:
  • the lookahead is a dynamic process. The continuous trajectory changes may affect the previously processed commands. Each time a new command is added to lookahead queue 208 and a stop distance is calculated for the new command, all the commands in the queue which have already been processed may be reviewed to determine whether the previously calculated stop distances for these commands need to be updated or not. After a new move is processed and placed in a Lookahead queue 208, all previous moves in queue 208 may be reviewed and may have their velocities adjusted downward if required.
  • the lookahead process includes a first step 216 of determining joint/path feedrate changes, and a second step 218 of looking ahead for the stop distance.
  • feedrate changes along the path from point Pj -1 to point P; are determined.
  • a segment length Lj may be determined between points Pj - 1 and Pj, as illustrated in Figure 11. Stop distances may also be determined for each of points Pi -I and Pi. The stop distance at point Pi -I should not be greater than the sum of Lj and the stop distance at point Pj. Else, it may not be possible to comply with velocity constraints beyond point Pj.
  • cmdi, cmd 2 , cmd 3 , cmd 4 , cmds, cmd ⁇ , ... , cmdj be consecutive commands in lookahead queue 208 which have been processed.
  • command cmd j 0 ⁇ j ⁇ i+1
  • path length be len j
  • stop distance be stopdis j .
  • a "valid stop distance condition" is defined as follows: If the stop distance stopdis j for the command cmd j is equal to or less than the sum of the path length leri j -n and the stop distance stopdis j+ i for the command cmd j+ i, then the command cmd j meets the "valid stop distance condition".
  • command cmd j does not meet the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., stopdis j is greater than the sum of len j+1 and stopdisj + j, then the stop distance for command cmd j will be replaced by the sum of leri j+ i and stopdis j+ t
  • stopdis j If command cmd j meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., stopdis j is equal to or less than the sum of len j +i and stopdisj+i, then stop distance stopdis j for command cmd j may remain unchanged, and the update operation is completed
  • the additive lookahead function When the additive lookahead function is, in a backward direction, sequentially reviewing the commands previously processed in lookahead queue 208, checking the "valid stop distance condition", and updating the stop distance of the commands, the updating operation may stop after the first command that meets the "valid stop distance condition" is found. Because the command meets the "valid stop distance condition", the stop distance of the command may remain unchanged. Thus, all the commands previous to the command were met and are still meeting the "valid stop distance condition”. That is, nothing changed and nothing needs to change. This is an advantageous property of the additive lookahead algorithm, which provides great efficiency for lookahead operation. Instead of looking back and updating the whole lookahead queue 208, only a few elements in the queue need to be updated, on average.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm introduces the concepts of stop distance and stopper.
  • the stop distance of a motion command with nominal feedrate v / ( Figure 32a) and end point speed vo may be defined as the distance traveled from a target point ( Figure 32b) to the point at which a full stop can be achieved according to the S-curve speed profile, as illustrated by the shaded area in Figure 32a.
  • Stopper which is a virtual target point for a motion command, may be selected such that if the system reduces speed from nominal feedrate vy and comes to a full stop at the stopper according to the S-curve, it passes the actual target point at the desired end point speed v ⁇ .
  • the stop distance may be defined as the distance between the target point and the stopper.
  • the stop distance has a direct correspondence to the end point speed; and if the stop distance is given, the end point speed may be accordingly uniquely determined, and vice versa.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm may use the stop distance as a metric of end point speed, which allows the algorithm to be computationally efficient, as discussed below.
  • the stopper may be used in an S-curve controller to design a motion profile.
  • the S-curve controller may aim at the stopper instead of at an actual target point.
  • the S-curve controller may generate a speed profile in which the controlled tool passes the actual target point at the same point in time at which the tool reaches the desired slowdown speed.
  • each motion command may have four speed limitations: specified feedrate, machine allowable speed, path velocity limit and joint velocity limit.
  • the specified feedrate may be defined as the desired feedrate value given by the upper-level motion planning.
  • the machine allowable speed is a machine limitation on the speed.
  • the maximum allowable speed depends on the hardware of the machine and laws of physics.
  • the path velocity limit is a limit for arc motion.
  • the path velocity limit may depend on the arc radius and tolerance specification. The larger the arc radius and tolerance are, the larger the maximum path velocity limit is.
  • the joint velocity limit may be defined as a speed limit at the joint of two consecutive motion commands.
  • the joint velocity limit may depend on the angle between the two motions and the tolerance specification. The larger the tolerance and the smaller the angle are, the larger the joint speed limit value is.
  • the nominal feedrate is the lowest value among the specified feedrate, the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit. For example, if the specified feedrate is higher than the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit, the lookahead algorithm would force the feedrate to slow down to the smaller value of the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit.
  • the slowdown feedrate at the end point of a motion command may depend on the joint velocity limit as well as the nominal feedrate of that motion command and the next motion command. Because the nominal feedrate is the smallest one among the specified feedrate, the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit, slowdown may occur during a current motion segment and speedup may occur in a next motion segment, such that the feedrate for the current motion segment may be less than the nominal value.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm may use the nominal and slowdown feedrates to calculate the stop distance.
  • the lookahead algorithm may ensure that the distance between the tool and some location ahead of the tool is sufficient to allow the speed of the tool to be changed to a desired level by the time the tool arrives at the location.
  • This condition may be referred to as a "valid stop distance condition" with regard to the additive lookahead algorithm and may be defined mathematically by equation (1):
  • motion command cmd_i has an end point at p_i, stopper point at stopper_i, and stop distance ds_i. If the stop distance of cmd_i does not exceed the sum of the length and stop distance of cmd_(i+l), or if the stopper_i is in front of the stopper_(i+l), then cmd_i satisfies the valid stop distance condition.
  • equation (2) indicates that the segment length l_(i+l) is long enough to accommodate a speed slowdown from the feedrate at the point p_i to the feedrate at the point p_(i+l).
  • a difference between a TBC additive lookahead algorithm and a non-additive lookahead algorithm is that the additive lookahead algorithm generates an S-curve targeting the stopper and uses only part of the S-curve so that the speed is reduced from vy to v ⁇ at the target point.
  • the non-additive lookahead generate an S-curve targeting the actual target point and the speed is reduced from vj to v ⁇ at the target point.
  • Fig. 34 shows a comparison between the additive and non-additive S-curve speed profile.
  • the speed is reduced from v; to v ⁇ at the target point in both profiles.
  • the slowdown occurs between time Ubci and time ta c o
  • the non- additive S-curve the slowdown occurs between time t wm i and time t wm o.
  • the non- additive S-curve requires a longer time and a longer distance than the additive S-curve in order to achieve the same reduction in speed from vj to v ⁇ .
  • Additive lookahead may be a dynamic process. The continuous trajectory changes may affect the previously-processed commands. Each time a new command is added to the lookahead queue and a stop distance is calculated for the new command, all the commands in the queue which have already been processed may be reviewed to see if the previously-calculated stop distances for these commands need to be updated or not. [00190] When a new command cmd; is received and processed, it has a path length l_i, and a stop distance d_i.
  • the additive lookahead algorithm may perform the following steps:
  • command cmdi-i does not meet the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., ds_(i-l) is greater than the sum of l_i and d_i, then replace the stop distance ds_(i-l) for command cmdn with the sum of I i and d_i.
  • command cmdj.i meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., ds_(i-l) is equal to or less than the sum of l__i and d_i, then the stop distance ds_(i-l) for command cmdj-i may remain unchanged, and the update operation is complete.
  • both the third and fifth steps i.e., the steps of calculating slowdown distance and the step of calculating a speed reduction for command i-1, may require a lot of computation, and may be calculated as shown in equations (4) and (5), respectively.
  • the "distance to slowdown”, equation (4), is similar to the "calculate stop distance” equation (3).
  • the two steps of the non-additive algorithm represented by equations (4) and (5) may need to be performed recursively until there is enough distance to slow down. Because the non-additive lookahead algorithm needs a longer distance to slow down a same amount of speed, as shown in Figure 34, the loop has to be repeated more times than the additive lookahead algorithm until enough distance is satisfied.
  • the additive lookahead may be more computationally efficient than the non-additive lookahead due to the additive lookahead having only one heavy load step compared with two heavy load steps in the non-additive lookahead.
  • Another reason the additive lookahead may be more computationally efficient than the non-additive lookahead is that the additive lookahead' s heavy load step is outside the recursive loop and is only performed once.
  • the non-additive lookahead performs the two heavy load steps recursively until enough distance is valid.
  • the additive lookahead also needs less distance to reduce a same amount of speed, , as shown in Figure 34, which means fewer previous motion commands need to be modified.
  • Non-additive lookahead algorithms may calculate the distance needed to accelerate/decelerate from one speed to another according to some speed profiles, such as the S-curve speed profile. When the distance of a motion segment is short and is not great enough to accommodate a large speed change, lookahead algorithms may calculate and limit the speed of that motion. The calculation of the speed limit involves a large amount of computation, and repeatedly performing the calculation is not desirable because it takes a lot of processing time and resources. [00200] The additive lookahead algorithm may use a stop distance concept as a metric of speed limitation. Updating the speed limit in the additive lookahead is only one addition compared with the large amount of computation involving solving cubic equations in non- additive lookahead algorithms. Overall, the computational efficiency, less iteration of modifying previous motions, and increased system throughput provide the additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention with several advantages over non-additive lookahead algorithms.
  • Figure 22 illustrates a method 2200 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11.
  • a first step 2202 a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified.
  • points Pj -2 , Pi -1 and Pj along a target tool path are identified.
  • a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined.
  • segment length Li +1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point P;.
  • Point Pj + i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known.
  • the location of point Pj +1 and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known.
  • a minimum allowable distance L; + i between points Pi and Pi +1 is known. Because point Pj +1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point Pj + i.
  • the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point Pi is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance Li +1 between points Pi and Pi +1 .
  • a last maximum allowable speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained.
  • the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance Lj +1 to the maximum speed at last point Pj at which it may be possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pj +1 , i.e., the last maximum allowable speed.
  • an other maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established.
  • the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the distance Lj to the maximum speed at other point Pi -I at which it may be possible for the tool to come slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon reaching point Pj.
  • the maximum allowable speed at other point Pi- i may be compared to a maximum allowable tolerance speed at other point Pj-), i.e., the maximum speed at other point Pi -1 at which it can be ensured that the actual tool path will remain within tolerance given the curvature of the target tool path at other point Pj-].
  • the lesser of the maximum allowable speed at other point PM and the maximum allowable tolerance speed at other point Pj - 1 may be identified, and the tool may be moved at this lesser speed at other point Pj -1 .
  • a preceding maximum allowable speed of the tool at a point Pj -2 preceding other point Pi -1 such that the tool may possibly slow down to the lesser speed upon arriving at other point P M may be established.
  • a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at preceding point Pi -2 may be determined dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and/or the curvature of the target tool path at preceding point Pj -2 .
  • a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point may be identified.
  • Figure 23 illustrates another method 2300 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11.
  • a first step 2302 a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified.
  • points Pj -2 , Pi-i and Pi along a target tool path are identified.
  • a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual tool path from the target tool path is established. For example, depending upon the requirements of the work piece, 0.1 cm might be established as the maximum allowable level of deviation of the actual tool path from the target tool path.
  • a curvature of the target tool path is ascertained at a plurality of locations along the target tool path.
  • an angle 1907 (Figure 11) between the line move from point P ⁇ to point Pj- 1 and the line move from point PM to point Pj may be ascertained at point PM.
  • a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at each of the points along the target tool path is determined. The maximum allowable tolerance speed is dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and the curvature. For example, given the angle 2307, a maximum allowable tolerance speed at point Pi -1 may be determined such that the actual tool path does not deviate from the target tool path by more than 0.1 cm.
  • a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined.
  • segment length Lj + 1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pj.
  • Point Pi + i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known. That is, the location of point Pi +1 and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known. However, a minimum allowable distance Li + 1 between points Pi and Pj + i is known. Because point Pi +1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point P;+i.
  • the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point Pj is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance L; + i between points P; and Pj +1 .
  • a last maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained.
  • the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance Li +1 to the maximum speed at last point Pi at which it may be possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pi +1 , i.e., the last maximum allowable speed.
  • an other maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at each of the points other than the last point such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established.
  • established is an other maximum allowable stopping speed at an other point Pj -I such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed at point Pj which was ascertained in step 2312.
  • the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the distance L; to the maximum speed at other point Pj - 1 at which it may be possible for the tool to come slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon reaching point Pj.
  • a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable stopping speed is identified at each of the points.
  • the lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed determined in step 2308 and the maximum allowable stopping speed established in step 2314 may be identified at each of points Pj -2 , PM and Pi.
  • Figure 24 illustrates yet another method 2400 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11.
  • a first step 2402 a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified.
  • points Pj -2 , Pj -I and Pj along a target tool path are identified.
  • a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined.
  • segment length Li + 1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pj.
  • Point Pi + i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known.
  • the location of point P; + i and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known.
  • a minimum allowable distance Lj +1 between points P, and Pi +1 is known. Because point Pj +1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point P ⁇ + ⁇ .
  • the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point P; is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance Lj +1 between points Pi and Pi +1 .
  • a maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that a required stopping distance of the tool at the other point is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point and the segment length between the other point and the last point.
  • a maximum allowable speed of the tool at point Pj -1 may be ascertained such that a required stopping distance of the tool at point Pi -I is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pi and segment length Lj between other point Pj -1 and last point Pj.
  • the S- curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the required stopping distance of the tool at point Pi -I to the maximum allowable speed at point Pj -1 .
  • a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at preceding point Pj -2 may be determined dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and/or the curvature of the target tool path at preceding point Pj -2 . A lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point may be identified.
  • the Queue Manager Task may be performed by a general queue manager in a queue module that manages all the operations performed on tolerance queue 202, compression queue 204, smoothing queue 206 and lookahead queue 208 in a pipeline manner.
  • the operations may include tolerance understanding on the elements in tolerance queue 202, compression on the elements in compression queue 204, preparatory, corrective, and double-arc smoothing on the elements in smoothing queue 206, third-order smoothing (if necessary), pre-lookahead (if necessary), and lookahead on the elements in lookahead queue 208.
  • the queue manager may call the related routines to manage the queue pipeline by performing the following operations: 1) stuff tolerance queue 202 with NC commands received from the NC interpreter; 2) process the NC commands in tolerance queue 202: if it is an E code, then get the tolerance information from this command and store the specified tolerance region and the related tolerance value; else, if it is a non-TBC motion command, calculate the required tolerance for this command according to the available tolerance information, and attach the required tolerance value to this command; 3) take NC commands from tolerance queue 202 and add them to compression queue 204; 4) merge the very short line moves to a longer one, i.e., replace the very short line elements by a longer line element in compression queue 204; 5) take NC commands from compression queue 204 and add them to smoothing queue 206; 6) examine all the line elements in smoothing queue 206 to identify those elements to be smoothed, and make local adjustments for those elements; 7) convert those line elements into arc elements; 8) take NC commands, mostly arc elements, from smoothing queue 206 and
  • the Queue Manager may call a first routine to perform all the queue operations and move the NC commands through the queue pipeline until all of the queues are full or the NC program is entirely loaded.
  • the first routine may call a second routine to perform the tolerance, compression and smoothing operations, and may call a third routine to perform the lookahead operation.
  • the motion kernel module may perform the tolerance based motion control and may control the motion associated with program lines and arcs.
  • the motion kernel may replace the non-TBC point-to-point control with the predictive and true arc motion, wherein a line or an arc is the basic trajectory unit.
  • a non-TBC CNC controller may interpolate a programmed trajectory into sequential target points with required velocities, and may load them into a PID motion control card for execution.
  • the non-TBC CNC controller may support time-based interpolation, i.e., breaking up the line/arc data into position points and velocity points of fixed (or variable) time intervals.
  • the motion control card may perform PID loops to minimize the following error, i.e., the lag between the instantaneous position and the interpolated target point.
  • an elastic string with one end attached to a motion axis, the other end stepping from target point to target point.
  • the length of the string represents the following error.
  • the motion control card may pull the axis to reduce the length of the string.
  • This motion control is a "pulling" mechanism, wherein line/arc data are interpolated into position points and velocity points of time intervals before execution. Individual axes may move independently under the motion control. Further, the trajectory interpolator may be an open loop, incapable of controlling the following errors. Lastly, the target points may be pre-computed, with little adjustment being made for real-time conditions.
  • the predictive TBC motion control may be based on a different mechanism that recognizes line/arc data (no pre-computed interpolation points) and directly pushes the axes along the line/arc trajectory.
  • the control may read the position feedback, may compare the current position with the commanded trajectory (a line or an arc), and may determine a point on the trajectory that is the point closest to the actual current position. This point may be defined as the ideal current position.
  • the difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position may be defined as the instantaneous random position error or tolerance error.
  • the instantaneous random position error also referred to simply as the "position error" may be thought of as the deviation of the actual current position from the line/arc trajectory.
  • the TBC tolerance error is different from the non-TBC following error. More particularly, the following error is the difference between the actual current position and the pre-computed target point on one axis.
  • the TBC tolerance error is the vector difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position which may be dynamically calculated in real time.
  • the pre-computed target points may be interpolated based on a time interval that is usually on the order of a millisecond.
  • the ideal current position may be calculated every control cycle.
  • the motion control card rather than the host computer, may deal with the following error.
  • the tolerance error may be directly corrected by TBC.
  • the tolerance errors for different axes may be handled coordinately by TBC.
  • the TBC predictive motion control at every control cycle, may perform the following steps:
  • the Run System Task may issue servo commands to the machine tool in order to follow the tool path and associated velocities determined in the preceding Queue Manager Task.
  • a command designating a portion of the tool path that the machine tool is to follow may be issued once per millisecond, for example.
  • the portion of the tool path may include a one or more line segments and/or one or more arcs.
  • a command specifies a line segment extending from (1,4,0) to (5,1,6) in x-y-z space.
  • a servo intended to redirect the tool path to compensate for any detected errors, i.e., deviations in the actual tool path from the corrected tool path, may be issued more frequently than a command.
  • a servo is issued every 200 microseconds, i.e., corresponding with each of the points A-F.
  • Figure 13 illustrates the timing and duration of each servo over the course of a one millisecond command. That is, Figure 13 illustrates the control loop cycle time of the servos.
  • Each servo may have a duration of less than 35 microseconds. In one embodiment, each servo has a duration of approximately between 10 and 15 microseconds.
  • the current position or some other parameter of the machine tool may be determined. Over the duration of the servo, calculations using the determined parameter may be performed.
  • an output signal to redirect the machine tool relative to the work piece may be issued.
  • a time period of 200 microseconds is used repeatedly herein as an example of a duration of a servo.
  • the cycle time of a servo may be less than or greater than 200 microseconds within the scope of the present invention.
  • the tool may continue to move past the first actual position B during the calculation of tool subpath 1202.
  • the Run System Task of Figure 2 includes a servo 220 having a compute position step 222, an S-Curve step 224, a Predictive Error Compensation step 226, and a Random Error Compensation step 228.
  • the tool may have veered off to point B instead of following the linear tool path from (1, 4, 0) to (5, 1, 6) due to random errors as well as predictive errors that are systematic and repeatable.
  • the predictive errors may be identified via empirical analysis of historic tool position data. Based upon the predictive error, it may be determined that redirecting the tool to point T is most likely to result in the tool actually moving near the desired linear tool path in a smooth motion from point B.
  • S-Curve step 224 includes calculating desired acceleration levels along target tool subpath 1202. More particularly, the acceleration needed to complete the servo from point B to point T, i.e., complete target tool subpath 1202, within a desired period of time and at a desired final velocity may be determined. In actuality, the tool may arrive at point C due to random errors and unidentified predictive errors. After additional servos, the tool arrives at points D, E and F. Point F may be reached at the end of the one millisecond command. More particularly, subsequent target tool subpaths may be calculated at the completion of each servo in a manner substantially similar to the calculation of target tool subpath 1202 as described above.
  • the target tool path from (1, 4, 0) to (5, 1, 6) and the target tool subpath 1202 are shown in Figure 12 as being linear. However, it is to be understood that any target tool path or any target tool subpath may be arcuate.
  • the second function performed by the Tolerance Controller is the Predictive Error Compensation (step 106 of Figure 1 and step 226 of Figure 2), which may be part of a "motion kernel."
  • the motion kernel replaces a non-TBC point-to-point control technique with predictive and true arc trajectory motion, wherein lines and arcs are the basic trajectory unit.
  • the predictive control pushes the axes along the programmed trajectory and corrects for deviations as they are encountered.
  • the Tolerance Control may read the position feedback, compare the current position with the commanded trajectory (a line or arc), and find a point on the trajectory that is the closest to the current actual position. This point on the trajectory may be defined and referred to as the current ideal position.
  • the difference between the current actual position and current ideal position as dynamically calculated in real time is defined as the position error, which may be dynamically calculated in real time.
  • the predictive control may analyze the motion trajectory and the machine condition to compensate for repeatable motion errors.
  • the correction for these errors may be predicted by using a parameterized mathematical model of the machine that has been configured by measuring actual dynamic machine responses.
  • Predictive motion control may analyze the motion trajectory and the machine condition to make appropriate compensations to certain types of motion errors, which are repeatable and can be measured by experiments.
  • the position error may then be combined with the predictive corrections to compute the new velocity command for each axis.
  • the predictive correction that may be done at each control cycle is illustrated in Figure 14.
  • the predictive error compensation may include Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, Tangential Acceleration Compensation, "Stick” Friction Compensation, Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation, Spindle Softness Compensation, and System Delay Compensation, which are each described in turn below.
  • the predictive control may precisely machine an arc move without linearizing the arc into many line segments.
  • the predictive control may instantaneously and in real time calculate the centripetal force needed to pull or hold the axes on the arc at each ideal current position according to the current velocity and the arc trajectory curvature.
  • the centripetal force may be converted to a predictive compensate vector, which may be instantaneously added to the velocity issued to the motion axes.
  • a centripetal force vector based on the current velocity and the arc curvature, is added to a predictive compensation vector that adjusts the velocity command issued to the motion axes. This correction may enable the machine to cut highly accurate arcs.
  • the predictive motion allows the direct precision machining of arc segments without the conversion of arc trajectories into a straight-line approximation.
  • Issuing a proportional velocity to multiple axes may not guarantee that a three- dimensional move is linear, i.e., in a straight line.
  • the motion axes involved may not go proportionally as required, because the acceleration/deceleration for different axes depend on their dynamics, which changes from axis to axis. Rather than the required straight-line move, the move may be curved due to differences in axis acceleration/deceleration caused by differing axis dynamics such as belt compliance or servo amplifier gain.
  • the predictive control may analyze the acceleration for each individual axis and calculate the appropriate compensation forces for the axes. These compensation forces may be converted to the predictive compensation vector to generate the required axis accelerations.
  • the stick friction or static friction of a machine tool has considerable influence on the motion control. An axis starting from rest requires an extra kick of energy to overcome the stick friction and begin moving. Under Stick Friction Compensation, to correct and compensate for the stick friction effect, the predictive motion uses a stick friction compensator that may trigger when an axis changes its motion direction, i.e., crosses a zero velocity point.
  • the compensation profile is a notch shape, the height and width of the notch is a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory.
  • the stick friction is different from machine to machine, and from axis to axis.
  • the compensation is a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory, and is different from machine to machine and from axis to axis.
  • This compensation may eliminate problems such as flat spots on an arc at the axis quadrants.
  • the compensator should be built for each individual axis.
  • Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation may correct and compensate for the mechanical inaccuracy and backlash of the machine axis ball screws.
  • the function of getting position feedback is responsible for the leadscrew and backlash compensation.
  • the position values used by the motion kernel are all leadscrew and backlash compensated according to the leadscrew mapping tables. Each time the axes position feedback is read, it may be adjusted by the leadscrew and backlash compensation values stored in leadscrew map tables. This compensation may correct for mechanical axis positioning errors and for "lost motion" during an axis direction change.
  • the mechanical frame of the Z-axis or the spindle may not be rigid enough, causing unwanted vibration during machining.
  • the Spindle Softness Compensation may modify the motion parameters for only the Z-axis to reduce this unwanted vibration.
  • the parameters that are modified may include the Z-axis velocity, acceleration and jerk, wherein jerk is defined as the change in acceleration per unit time.
  • jerk is defined as the change in acceleration per unit time.
  • the machine system response to a motion command is typically delayed for mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, there may be a mechanical delay between axis motor motion and actual axis motion because of the mechanical transmission. There also may be an electrical delay between the input of a velocity command to the servo amplifier and actual motion on the motor.
  • the predictive control may compensate for this delay under System Delay Compensation by giving an anticipated adjustment before it is actually needed. This may provide the necessary correction to the motion axes at the time it is needed on the programmed trajectory.
  • the Tolerance Control may compensate for predictive, recurring errors.
  • the predictive control may push the axes along the programmed trajectory and the compensation from the machine model may compensate for and correct repeatable machine errors. Both of these adjustments may greatly reduce the position error between the current position and the line/arc trajectory.
  • the Tolerance Control may correct random error, as illustrated in Figure 15. Any remaining position error that is not corrected by the predictive control as illustrated in Figure 14 may be further reduced by the random error correction mechanisms.
  • the TBC greatly reduces the instantaneous position error (the deviation of the actual current position from the line/arc trajectory).
  • Random error correction is analogous to driving on a road and making small adjustments to the steering wheel in order to compensate for variations in the surface of the road and to thereby stay exactly in the center of the road.
  • the position deviation resulting from the random error occurred in real-time is further reduced by using random error correction mechanisms, which may include Proportional Control, Integral Control, Derivative Control, S-Curve Acceleration and Velocity Control, and Dynamic Velocity Adjustments. Each of these random error correction mechanisms is described in turn below.
  • the position error may be multiplied by a proportional gain parameter to arrive at the random corrective velocity vector.
  • the resulting random corrective velocity vector may be subtracted from the Predictive Correction velocity, i.e., from the commanded velocity, to thereby reduce the error.
  • the position error may be integrated using a modified Laplace transform algorithm.
  • a correction value which is proportional to the above- integrated result, may be computed and added to the Predictive Correction velocity (commanded velocity).
  • the modified Laplace transform algorithm may eliminate position error that persists over a period of time.
  • a direct integral control may cause undesirable oscillation.
  • a lower frequency modified Laplace transformation may be used to integrate the position errors with much less oscillation.
  • a derivative value of the position error may be added to the Predictive Correction velocity to dampen the Random Error correction. This dampening may improve the stability of the Random Error correction.
  • An artificial viscous friction may be added to increase the damping coefficient of the system so that the system is steadier. This is equivalent to a proportional plus derivative control.
  • S-Curve Acceleration and Velocity Control changes in velocity that are defined in the part program or are adjusted by the Additive Lookahead algorithm may be controlled using S-curve acceleration.
  • the S-curve acceleration may be computed at each 200 ⁇ sec control cycle or servo cycle. Thus, very smooth control of the axes motion and, ultimately, the axes position may be provided.
  • S-Curve acceleration provides a non-linear acceleration method that softens and smoothes the transition between the at- velocity phase and the acceleration/deceleration phase.
  • the S-Curve velocity profile typically has seven phases, including increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed (constant velocity); increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration.
  • Non-TBC CNC control uses a time-based scheduling mechanism.
  • Curve may be implemented as a function of time.
  • the function output is the scheduled position and velocity.
  • the TBC uses the true arc technology.
  • the ideal position on the trajectory may be calculated instead of the scheduled position.
  • the S-Curve in the TBC system may be implemented as a real-time process.
  • the velocity may be calculated from the instantaneous path distance at every control cycle. This mechanism may eliminate the velocity error accumulation and may support some real-time requests such as feed override, pause, resume and single step.
  • the S-Curve in TBC may have the typical seven phases of increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed (constant velocity); increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration.
  • the increasing acceleration phase may include a constant initial jerk JO. Acceleration may be linearly increased to the maximum acceleration with the initial jerk JO. Velocity may increase as a quadratic function of time.
  • Acceleration may remain at the maximum acceleration.
  • Velocity may increase as a linear function of time.
  • jerk In the decreasing acceleration phase, jerk may equal -J, wherein J is the maximum jerk. Acceleration may linearly decrease from the maximum acceleration to 0 with the negative maximum jerk -J. Velocity may increase as a quadratic function of time.
  • jerk In the increasing deceleration phase, jerk may equal -J, wherein J is the maximum jerk. Deceleration may linearly increase from 0 to the maximum deceleration with the maximum jerk J. Velocity may decrease from the final velocity as a quadratic function of time. [00244] In the constant deceleration phase, there may be no jerk, i.e., jerk may equal 0. Deceleration may remain at the maximum deceleration. Velocity may decrease as a linear function of time.
  • jerk In the decreasing deceleration phase, jerk may equal the maximum jerk J. Deceleration may decrease linearly from the maximum deceleration to 0 with jerk being equal to the maximum jerk J. Velocity may decrease as a quadratic function of time. [00246] During the lookahead processing, the additive lookahead algorithm discussed above may attach a stop distance to each motion command. The stop distance may be used in the S-Curve implementation to guarantee that there is enough distance in which to accelerate/decelerate properly between velocities.
  • S-Curve computation involves the use of several variables, such as distance_to_go to represent the trajectory length from the current position to the target position of a command.
  • Variable stop_distance_left represents the sum of distance_to_go and the value of the stop_distance attached to the command. The values of distance_to_go and stop_distance_left may vary with the instantaneous position of the machine.
  • Variable stop_distance_required represents the moving distance required to completely stop the machine according to the velocity, deceleration and the S-Curve for the command. The value of stop_distance_required may vary with the velocity.
  • stop_distance_left and stop_distance_required for this command may be calculated and compared.
  • a velocity/distance conversion algorithm may be used to calculate the velocity from the stop_distance_left, as described in more detail below.
  • the velocity in each of the seven phases may be calculated as described below.
  • acceleration maximum_acceleration
  • acceleration equals maximum_acceleration.
  • fmal_velocity - velocity 0.5 x J x t 2 , wherein J is the maximum jerk, and t is the time required to reach the final velocity. Since the acceleration equals the product of jerk and time, i.e., J x t, the equation above may be rearranged as:
  • Phase 3 (decreasing acceleration) may be entered.
  • Phase 4 steady state speed
  • velocity equals the maximum_velocity
  • acceleration equals 0.
  • the velocity may be calculated using a velocity/distance conversion algorithm.
  • stop_distance_left is less than or equal to the value of stop_distance_required (the condition automatically satisfies in Phases 5, 6 and
  • the velocity/distance conversion algorithm may be used to calculate the velocity from the stop_distance_left. The key features of one embodiment of this algorithm are described below.
  • the moving distance of the machine during t 2 - U may be defined as the stop_distance_required at time t ⁇ .
  • axes may have different maximum velocities.
  • the maximum velocity of the Z axis is usually lower than the maximum velocity of the X axis or of the Y axis.
  • f(dmv) Min ⁇ maxv_x, maxv_y, maxv_z ⁇
  • the machine tool starts from the origin, along the direction of an arbitrary direction vector dmv, and with a given vector velocity f(dmv), and moves for one unit of time, then the machine tool will arrive at a certain end point.
  • the end points resulting from all possible moving directions will form a three-dimensional surface, which is referred to as the velocity envelope.
  • the shape of the velocity envelope depends on the function f. In this case, the distance from an end point to the origin is a constant Min ⁇ maxv_x, maxv_y, maxv_z ⁇ , and thus the velocity envelope is a sphere.
  • An aggressive strategy is to move the machine tool along direction dmv with the highest possible vector velocity, provided the velocities of axes X, Y, and Z are bounded by maxv ⁇ x, maxv_y and maxv_z, respectively.
  • the velocity envelope is a three- dimensional cubic box, with length 2 x maxv_x, width 2 x maxv_y, and height 2 x maxv_z.
  • the velocity envelope can be used to define the velocity coordinate type of axes.
  • AXIS_VELOCITY_CUBIC_TYPE AXIS_VELOCITY_CYLINDER_TYPE
  • AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE_TYPE AXIS_VELOCITY_SPHERE_TYPE.
  • the TBC may use AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE JTYPE.
  • the velocity envelope of AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE_TYPE is a three-dimensional ellipse, with X axis length equal to 2 x maxvjc, Y axis length equal to 2 x maxv_y and Z axis length equal to 2 x maxv__z.
  • the TBC supports the dynamic velocity adjustment.
  • the Tolerance Control may monitor the position error and compare the error with the specified tolerance.
  • a safety level defined as a percentage of the required tolerance, may be used to control the position error. If the position error is beyond the safety level, the axes velocity may automatically be decreased in order to reduce the position error. If the position error is below the safety level, the axes velocity may automatically be increased to the original velocity. In this way, the machine may be allowed to run as fast as possible, or nearly so, while still maintaining the desired tolerance.
  • the dynamic velocity adjustment may be based on a Laplace transformation.
  • the TBC motion kernel of the present invention may take the motion commands from the lookahead queue and control the servo system to track the contour trajectory.
  • the TBC motion control is different from non-TBC motion control in that it is a closed-loop contour tracking control. A comparison between non-TBC motion control and TBC motion control is provided below.
  • non-TBC motion control system may decompose the three-dimensional contour into X/Y/Z axes and interpolate the X/Y/Z motion with respect to time.
  • Each axis may have its own time based reference trajectory and may use feedback and feedforward control to track its own motion trajectory independently. Ideally, if each axis tracks its reference trajectory perfectly, the resulting three-dimensional contour would also be perfectly followed. Due to the existence of disturbances, shown in Figure 37, and modeling errors, perfect tracking is normally not achievable and there may be tracking errors between the actual axis motions and reference trajectories. There may be an attempt to minimize the tracking error in each axis without any teamwork or coordination among the three axes.
  • the trajectory of each axis may be tracked without knowing or caring what the state of the trajectory in other axes is. For example, even if the trajectory in one axis meets a large resisting force and lags behind its reference trajectory, there may be an attempt to track the preset trajectories of the other two axes. The result is that even though the trajectory may be tracked perfectly though two of the three axes, the actual contour that is achieved may still deviate from the reference contour significantly.
  • the non-TBC motion control system illustrated in Figure 37 may be time deterministic. That is, the x/y/z axis motion trajectories may be time based and the entire system's runtime may be accurately determined beforehand.
  • F_x, F_y and F_z may indicate feedforward controllers for each of the three axes; and C__x, C_y and C_z may indicate feedback controllers for each of the three axes.
  • the contour tracking may be open loop in non-TBC motion control. Motion along each of the three axes may be independent without knowledge of, or dependence upon, motion along any other axis. In other words, there may be no teamwork among the axes. There may be no arc motion even with circular interpolation in non-TBC motion control. Different dynamic responses in the axes may negatively affect tracking accuracy and surface quality.
  • non-TBC motion control the contour tracking may be open loop, and there may be no guarantee that the actual contour achieved is close enough to the desired reference contour.
  • the non-TBC motion controller may control motion in the x and y axes to track their trajectories independently. Two different cases are represented in Figures 38b-d. Case 1 is characterized by small tracking errors in both x and y axes; however the contouring error as shown in Figure 38d is relatively large.
  • Case 2 is characterized by larger tracking errors in both x and y axes, but there is no contouring error at all shown in Figure 38d. Because the non-TBC motion control reduces the tracking error in each axis individually without any coordination among axes, the non-TBC motion system may consider case 1 to be more desirable than case 2.
  • TBC motion control does not involve decomposing a three-dimensional contour into three independent time-based axis trajectories. Rather, TBC motion control may compare the actual contour position with a reference contour and determine a control signal to minimize the contour error.
  • TBC motion control structure is shown in Fig. 39, where all signals are vectors and represented by thick lines. In contrast, in the non-TBC motion control structure shown in Fig. 37, signals are scalars and are represented by thin lines.
  • the TBC motion control structure of Figure 39 may employ contour-based feedback plus feedforward control.
  • the contour tracking may be closed-loop, and true arc motion may be possible. That is, the tool may be commanded to follow an arcuate trajectory rather than a trajectory formed by a series of linear segments that approximate a curved trajectory.
  • TBC motion control may not be time deterministic, and may be capable of on- the-fly feedrate adjustments.
  • the controller may read the actual contour position feedback, compare the actual position with the reference contour, and find out the closest point on the reference contour to the actual position. This point is defined as the ideal current position (ICP).
  • the controller may include three functional blocks: feedforward, feedback and stick friction/backlash compensation as illustrated in Figure 40 and described below.
  • the controller may calculate the desired motion based on the ICP (including acceleration and velocity in both normal and tangential directions), and may include a feedforward controller to convert the desired motion into a velocity control signal.
  • a runtime feedrate adjuster may also be added to adjust the feedrate (velocity) for tolerance control purposes.
  • the controller may also calculate the tracking errors in both normal and tangential directions at every cycle.
  • the error in the normal direction is the distance from the actual contour position to the ICP, i.e., the tolerance error or contour error.
  • the error in the tangential direction is defined as the amount of path length that the ICP lags behind.
  • the TBC controller may include two different feedback controllers for the normal and tangential errors and may convert the tracking errors into a velocity control signal.
  • the stick friction and backlash compensation may further improve the accuracy of the machine tool.
  • an advantage of the TBC motion control is the closed-loop structure.
  • the closed-loop contour tracking control may coordinate the three axes and minimize the contour error. For example, if the x-axis has a large resisting force and lags behind its reference trajectory, the other two axes could slow down to match the x-axis motion so that the actual contour follows the reference contour.
  • the TBC motion kernel may also enable true arc motion because the centripetal acceleration may be considered in the control.
  • the system may no longer be time deterministic. However, on-the-fly feedrate adjustment may be possible. When the contour/tolerance error is below the specified value, the system feedrate may be increased. Conversely, when the contour/tolerance error exceeds the specified value, the feedrate may be reduced such that the error is also reduced. In other words, the system may maximize the feedrate while maintaining the contour/tolerance error within a specified range for optimal system runtime or throughput.
  • the motion kernel may receive motion commands from lookahead queue 208.
  • the motion commands may go through tolerance understanding processing, data compressing, data smoothing, and lookahead processing before being executed by the motion kernel.
  • Each command may carry the required tolerance value for TBC control and the stop distance for S-Curve computation.
  • the motion kernel may be executed every 200 ⁇ sec in RTSS environment wherein a deterministic response is ensured.
  • Figure 16 illustrates one embodiment of a method 1600 of the present invention for executing a motion kernel. In a first step 1602, an element is taken from lookahead queue 208. The element may be the motion command to be executed next.
  • a routine may be used to initialize and calculate some variables and parameters which are needed for executing the command just taken in step 1602.
  • a routine that is the main part of the motion kernel is executed.
  • the routine of step 1606 may perform the predictive motion, true arc move, tolerance control and S-Curve computation.
  • a routine may determine whether the execution of the current motion command has been completed. If so, operation is returned to step 1602 to take another motion command from lookahead queue 208. If not, operation is returned to step 1606 to continue performance of the predictive motion, true arc move, tolerance control and S-Curve computation.
  • Step 1606 may include twenty substeps as described below, and referred to in Figures 39 and 40, in order to convert a motion command into a servo amplifier digital-to- analog converter (DAC) command, or a servo amplifier command for use with pulse width modulation and digital controls and drives. These twenty substeps may be performed within servo 220.
  • Step 1 the current tool position is obtained, and the position may be leadscrew and backlash compensated.
  • Position geometry analysis is performed in Step 2. More particularly, four computations may be made: the ideal current position on the arc or line trajectory; the current tangential moving direction; the positional deviation from the ideal position; and the tolerance error.
  • Step 3 includes performing lag distance delay compensation.
  • the lag distance required to compensate time delay in the system may be computed, and this lag distance may be added to the stop distance which is used to calculate the velocity by the S-Curve.
  • S-Curve velocity control is performed in Step 4.
  • the tool velocity may be calculated as a function of stop distance according to the S Curve.
  • the output is relative speed, having a value between 0 and 1.
  • Modified Laplace transformation and tangential predictive control is performed in Step 5.
  • the current velocity may be estimated by the modified Laplace transformation.
  • Tangential predictive control may be added.
  • Step 6 includes velocity control for axes. Velocity components may be computed for each axis. The computation may be based on the velocity calculated at step 4 and the tangential moving direction computed at step 2.
  • Step 7 Acceleration is estimated in Step 7.
  • the centripetal force as well as the compensation vector for the centripetal compensation may be estimated.
  • the order, i.e., sequence, of Steps 5 through 7 is arbitrary and may be changed in the program code.
  • Step 8 includes centripetal predictive compensation in which the centripetal compensation vector may be added to velocity.
  • Step 9 includes statistical analysis, and may be used for research.
  • Step 10 the current moving direction is computed.
  • the current moving direction may be needed for looking up the leadscrew mapping tables to implement the leadscrew/backlash position compensation.
  • Step 11 includes viscous friction estimation in which the error velocity is estimated.
  • Step 12 includes random error correction and viscous friction correction.
  • the random error correction vector may be calculated, and the viscous friction may be added thereto.
  • a run time velocity adjustment is performed in Step 13. It is determined whether the position error is within the safety tolerance level. If so, the velocity slow down function may be disabled. If not, the velocity slow down function may be enabled, which may decrease the velocity accordingly.
  • Step 14 includes a variable gain calculation in which the constant gain, the first order gain, the second order gain, and the combined gain may be calculated.
  • machine vibrations may be analyzed, compensated for, and/or eliminated.
  • Random error correction may be performed in Step 16.
  • the random error correction vector may be multiplied by the combined gain.
  • the random error correction vector may be truncated and/or applied to velocity.
  • Step 17 the velocity error may be reduced by using a modified Laplace transformation.
  • Step 18 includes motor saturation protection.
  • the DAC voltage change may be detected at every cycle.
  • the DAC voltage value may be truncated if it is too high.
  • Velocity coordination may be performed in Step 19. Machine movement for axes may be coordinated with non-uniform maximum velocities.
  • Step 20 a velocity command, ranging from -10 to +10 volts, may be transmitted in order to control velocity.
  • a "Rapid Line” motion command initiates a straight line move that may be executed at the maximum feedrate for each axis in the move.
  • a Rapid Line command always stops at the end of a move, while a Line command may not.
  • a Rapid Line command may be used to move the tool to a given point as fast as possible.
  • the TBC motion kernel may be deployed on a wide variety of CNC machine platform types. Like other CNC controllers, parameters may be adjusted to optimize the control's performance for a particular machining platform or environment. Adjustment of these parameters is referred to as "tuning".
  • the present invention encompasses five categories of tuning parameters, including S-Curve control parameters, smoothing/compression control parameters, motor speed adjustment parameters, dynamic control gains, and a speed/radius tolerance relation lookup table.
  • the S-Curve control parameters are adjustable within a reasonable range in order to achieve maximum allowable speed, maximum allowable acceleration, maximum allowable deceleration, maximum allowable start jerk, and/or maximum allowable end jerk.
  • Smoothing/Compression control parameters are also adjustable within a reasonable range in order to achieve first order smoothing length limit (segments longer than value are not smoothed), first order smoothing angle limit (angles larger than value are not smoothed), second order smoothing length limit, and/or data compression Off/On control.
  • Motor speed adjustment parameters may be manually adjustable to achieve M - multiplier (i.e., at X percent of maximum voltage, X percent of maximum speed is observed), and/or B - constant drifting adjuster for each axis (electronic zero compensation).
  • Dynamic control gains may be preset for a machine class, and may be manually modifiable as needed. Dynamic control gains may include time/response gain parameters. Excessively high values of the time/response gain parameters may cause oscillations, and low values may cause slow/soft motion response.
  • the speed/radius tolerance relation lookup table may be preset for each class of machines, and may be manually adjusted as necessary.
  • the above-described tuning parameters may be listed together with other system configuration parameters in a configuration file which may be read and interpreted during the system configuration time.
  • the TBC motion kernel may load the command and analyze the geometry.
  • the stopper plane normal (SPN) direction and stopper position may be calculated in the pre-analysis and may be used through the entire executing period until this motion command is finished.
  • SPN may be calculated as indicated by equation (6) and shown in Figure 41, which illustrates the line motion geometry pre-analysis:
  • the SPN may be calculated as indicated by equation (7) and shown in Figure 42, which illustrates arc motion geometry pre-analysis, where APN stands for the unit direction vector of the arc plane normal direction, and C stands for the center of the arc.
  • the stopper position Psi may be calculated as indicated by equation (8) for both line and arc motions.
  • the TBC motion kernel may read the actual contour (tool) position feedback PtI and compare the actual position with the reference contour to find the ideal current position (ICP), contour/tolerance error (e n ) and the distance_to_go d (to the stopper).
  • ⁇ a,b> is the inner production of vector a and vector b.
  • a [xa, ya, za]
  • b [xb, yb, zb]
  • ⁇ a,b> xa*xb + ya*yb + za*zb.
  • PtI is the tool position
  • Psi is the stopper position of the i motion segment
  • SPN is the unit direction vector of stopper plane normal (SPN) direction. Equation (9) may be interpreted as the distance d being equal to the length of Ptl-Psi in the SPN direction.
  • the tool position may be first projected onto the arc plane, as may be calculated as indicated in equation (11) and as shown in Figures 44a-b, which are illustrative of arc motion geometry analysis.
  • Equation (11) may be interpreted as P'tl being equal to the unit arc plane normal direction vector APN being multiplied by a difference between vector (PtI-Ci) and the vector ⁇ Ptl-Ci, APN>.
  • the vector P'tl is the projection of (PtI-Ci) on the arc plane. Once the vector P'tl is found on the arc plane, then ICP, the unit tangential and radial direction vectors dt and dr, and contour/tolerance error e n (also referred to as the normal error) may be determined as indicated in equations ( 12), ( 13), ( 14) and ( 15).
  • the distance_to_go i.e., the path length from ICP to the stopper
  • the arc length between ICP and target point Pi may first be calculated. Any arc that is more than 180 degrees may be cut into two arcs.
  • the distance_to_go may be calculated by use of the following three equations (16), (17) and (18). The meanings of the variables of equations (16), (17) and (18) may be discerned with reference to Figures 44a-b.
  • S-Curve acceleration provides a non-linear acceleration method that softens and smoothes the transition between the at-the-speed phase and the acceleration/deceleration phase. It is referred to as "S-Curve" because the acceleration/deceleration part of the velocity profile is S-shaped instead of linear.
  • the S Curve velocity profile usually has seven phases: increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed; increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration.
  • Non-TBC motion control systems may use the S-Curve to generate reference trajectories, i.e., scheduled position, velocity, acceleration and so on.
  • the S-Curve is time- based and implemented outside the control loop (real-time portion).
  • the TBC S-Curve controller may be different from the Non-TBC S-Curve controller.
  • the TBC S-Curve controller may calculate the desired velocity and acceleration along the reference contour trajectory.
  • the TBC S-Curve controller may be distance-based and implemented as a real time process. The velocity may be calculated from the instantaneous path distance at every control cycle.
  • FIG. 45 A flow chart of one embodiment of a method of operation 4500 of a TBC S-Curve controller is shown in Figure 45.
  • a first step 4502 the flag is checked to see if the current system status is "accelerate” or "decelerate.” If the status is decelerate, operation proceeds to step 4512. On the other hand, if the current status is "accelerate”, the stop_distance_required is calculated in step 4504.
  • the stop_distance_required may be defined as the minimum distance that the tool would travel according to the S-curve before the system could bring the tool to a stop.
  • the stop distance may be a function of current speed and acceleration.
  • step 4506 if the given distance_to_go “d" is greater than the stop_distance_required "dO", which means that it is safe to continue to move forward, then operation proceeds to step 4512 to calculate the desired acceleration and velocity. Otherwise, if the distance_to_go "d" is less than the stop_distance_required "dO", which means the system must brake immediately, then brake information is calculated and the flag is set to decelerate in step 4508.
  • step 4510 may be modified in step 4510 so that the system does not overshoot.
  • Step 4512 may be considered the core of the S-Curve controller. According to the current system status and the critical distances calculated beforehand, the S-Curve phase, desired velocity and acceleration may be determined in step 4512. Because the S-Curve controller runs in real time, care may be taken to ensure that the controller does not run out of data.
  • step 4516 on-the-fly feedrate adjustment and user override is applied.
  • step 4518 an advanced nonlinear jerk-acceleration- velocity (JAV) filter is applied to remove the noise in the velocity signal.
  • JAV jerk-acceleration- velocity
  • Feed forward may be based on the ideal current position (ICP).
  • ICP ideal current position
  • "d" represents the distance_to_go obtained from the geometry analysis; and dt and dr represent unit tangential and radial/normal direction vectors, respectively.
  • a lag distance compensation block 4602 the lag distance required to compensate time delay in the system may be computed and added to the distance_to_go to arrive at a compensated distance.
  • S-Curve controller 4604 may receive the compensated distance and calculate the desired velocity v and acceleration a (both v and a are scalars) along the trajectory.
  • the acceleration a on line 4606 may be multiplied by the unit tangential direction vector dt 4608 to produce the tangential acceleration vector at 4610.
  • the feed forward gain, Kaff may convert the tangential acceleration at into a control signal FF at, which is acceptable by the servo system.
  • the Modified Laplace block 4612 may estimate the current velocity, compare the current velocity with last velocity command, and add a predictive compensation into the S- curve velocity command v to reduce the tangential tracking error.
  • the compensated velocity command multiplies the unit tangential direction vector dt 4608 and becomes the tangential velocity vector vt 4614. Because the servo system takes the velocity control commands, no further conversion may be needed for the velocity vector.
  • a feed forward gain 1 at 4616 results in a signal FFvt and may enable all channels to be at the same level.
  • the runtime or "on-the-fly" feedrate adjuster is a unique feature of TBC motion control, and is not available in other control systems.
  • the non-TBC, time-based control strategy's reference contour trajectory is predetermined outside the control loop, and no modification can be done inside the control loop.
  • the TBC motion kernel may not have any predetermined reference trajectories, and desired motion may be determined inside the control loop at every control cycle based on the current system condition.
  • the runtime feedrate adjuster may be possible.
  • the difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position may be defined as the instantaneous random position error or tolerance error.
  • the instantaneous random position error also referred to simply as the "position error” may be thought of as the deviation of the actual current position from the desired line/arc trajectory.
  • the runtime feedrate adjuster may compare the position/tolerance error to the specified error tolerance. If the position error is bigger than, or too close to, the specified error tolerance, the runtime feedrate adjuster may slow down the feedrate to improve tracking accuracy. On the other hand, if the error is smaller than, and not too close to, the specified tolerance, the runtime feedrate adjuster may increase the feedrate to improve the system throughput. Generally, the speed of the tool may be increased if the position error is below the specified error tolerance, and the speed of the tool may be decreased if the position error is above the specified error tolerance. It is possible, in one embodiment, to not increase the feedrate even if the contour error is very small, but to retain the ability to either increase or reduce the feedrate as appropriate.
  • the runtime feedrate adjuster may be a constrained optimization mechanism. That is, under the constraint of the contour/tolerance error within a specified range, the runtime feedrate adjuster may maximize the feedrate to achieve optimal system throughput.
  • the normal error e n may be defined as the shortest distance from the current tool position to the reference contour, and TBC motion control may reduce this error. Because this is a three-dimensional error, the coordinated motion of the three axes together may be needed to correct it.
  • the error may also be five or six- dimensional when additional axes, in the form of rotational axes, are included in the trajectories and in the calculations. Thus, where three dimensions or three axes are referred to in the discussion below, it is to be understood that the discussion is equally applicable to multi-dimensional systems including more than three dimensions and more than three axes.
  • a fundamental difference between the TBC and the non-TBC control is that the non-TBC control typically decomposes the three-dimensional reference contour trajectory into three independent axis motions, and controls the three axes without any knowledge of the contour/tolerance error.
  • the TBC motion control may directly address the three-dimensional contour/tolerance error.
  • the actual position of the tool may be sensed along each of three axes.
  • a three-dimensional position error between the actual position of the tool in each of the three axes and a desired position of the tool in each of the three axes may then be calculated.
  • a three-dimensional position error signal dependent upon the calculated the three-dimensional position error may be produced.
  • the speed and/or direction of the tool may be controlled dependent upon the three-dimensional position error signal.
  • three-dimensional position errors may be calculated by use of vector mathematics.
  • TBC control may enable motion along one axis to affect motion control along the other two axes in real time, i.e., there may be intercoupling between the motion control of the different axes.
  • Non-TBC motion control may not include compensating for inter-axes effects, such as centripetal force, as TBC motion control may. Because of the lack of compensation for centripetal force, a tool controlled by a non-TBC method may systematically travel radially outward of a desired arcuate trajectory.
  • the TBC motion control may use a variable-gain feedback control to address the normal error.
  • the error may be calculated in the real time geometry analysis 4002 ( Figure 40).
  • a special feedback controller Cn may provide system stability and reduce the normal error.
  • variable gain ⁇ 4702 may be a function of both tangential velocity and normal acceleration. Loosely speaking, the faster the system moves, the larger the gain that is needed to correct the normal error. The larger the gain, the more quickly the normal error may be corrected.
  • the TBC may generate a tangential velocity command.
  • the integration of the tangential velocity commands may produce a position on the reference contour, which may be considered a current target point on the reference contour.
  • the tangential error may be defined as the path length from the ideal current position (ICP) to the current target point.
  • a feedback controller Ct 4004 ( Figure 40) may reduce the tangential error.
  • the TBC feedback control may include two parts: tangential error feedback control and normal error feedback control. Instead of treating the two errors the same or equally, two feedback controllers may be provided for the errors, with each feedback controller addressing a respective one of the two errors.
  • a first reason for the different treatment of the two errors is that the normal error may be more important than the tangential error in terms of tracking accuracy and surface finish quality, and thus more weight may be placed on the normal error.
  • a second reason for the different treatment of the two errors is that the servo system may have limited power, and it may be desirable to use the power to do more important things first.
  • two different feedback controllers may be used for treating normal and tangential errors.
  • the normal error loop may have higher bandwidth or faster dynamic response. Loosely speaking, more servo power may be used to correct normal error than tangential error, and the normal error may be reduced faster than the tangential error.
  • the stick friction may have a considerable influence on the motion control.
  • the TBC motion kernel may use a stick friction compensator. This compensator may be triggered when an axis changes its motion direction, i.e., across a zero velocity point.
  • the compensation profile may have a notch shape, with the height and width of the notch being a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory.
  • Leadscrews may be used in machine tools as a mechanical transmission to convert rotary motion into linear motion. The inaccuracy of the ball screw and backlash may need to be compensated.
  • the position values used by the motion kernel may be all leadscrew and backlash compensated according to the leadscrew mapping tables.
  • the compensation block may determine the current moving direction, which may be needed for looking up the leadscrew mapping table to implement leadscrew/backlash position compensation.
  • the compensation block may also compensate for the stick friction.
  • the TBC motion control signal may be the sum of the feed forward control signal, the feedback control signal and the stick friction compensation signal.
  • protection procedure Before sending the control signal to the servo system through digital-to-analog converters (DACs), protection procedure may be performed to avoid overloading the machine.
  • the protection procedure may include two steps, including a first step of limiting the control signal changing rate.
  • the servo system may receive the velocity command, and the control signal change rate may correspond to acceleration/deceleration.
  • the S-Curve controller may take the acceleration/deceleration into account, it is still possible that the overall control signal may change too fast due to other reasons, such as tracking error feedback, disturbances, stick friction compensation, and so on.
  • the control signal change rate may be limited. That is, if the difference between the current and previous control commands exceeds a threshold, the current command may be limited so that the difference is saturated at the threshold.
  • a second step of the protection procedure may be to limit the control signal. Both the DAC and the servo system may be capable of receiving only limited control signal input up to a maximum amount. If the current control command exceeds this threshold, then steps may be taken to saturate the current control command to the maximum control input.
  • Figure 17 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a machine 1700 of the present invention for machining a work piece 1702.
  • Machine 1700 includes a controller in the form of a controller card 1704, an actuator in the form of servo drives 1706x, 1706y, 1706z, 1706s, a cutting tool 1708, and position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz and 1710s, which may be in the form of encoders.
  • the machine tool retains and carries cutting tool 1708 while the cutting tool rotates and engages the work piece, as indicated by the dashed line between the work piece and the cutting tool in Figure 17.
  • the machine tool provides a mounting approach and linear/rotational drive approach for the cutting tool.
  • Cutting tool 1708 is the material remover in machine 1700, and may be mounted in the rotating spindle mechanism (not shown) which may be attached to the z-axis of the machine tool.
  • the geometric orientation of the cutting tool with respect to the work piece may be fixed due to its mounting position on the z-axis.
  • controller card 1704 includes connectors 1712, 1714, 1716 and 1717 for physically connecting controller card 1704 to servo drives 1706 and position sensors 1710 in order to facilitate communications.
  • Servo drives 1706 may move work piece 1702 in the x, y and z axes and rotate cutting tool 1708 about the z-axis.
  • Four connectors 1712, 1714, 1716, 1717 are depicted on controller card 1704, one for each controlled axis of motion and one for the rotation of cutting tool 1708, but other configurations are also possible.
  • the communication signals exchanged between controller card 1704 and servo drives 1706 must often be converted into the appropriate format.
  • Some actuator motors use an analog voltage input signal between -10 volts and +10 volts to determine at what rate the motors should turn.
  • Most digital computers like the Intel Pentium Based PC, do not support analog voltages, but utilize groups of bits (ones and zeros) represented by discrete voltage levels (+5 volts and 0 volts) to represent values.
  • a PC based motion control card were to command a motor to spin in the clockwise direction at its maximum speed (+10 volts in our example) the collection of bits representing this request would have to be converted to the +10 volt signal understood by the motor.
  • This conversion of signals for communication purposes is standard in the industry and often performed by the input/output, I/O, module of the controller card. In Figure 17, one I/O module (1718, 1720 and 1722) is depicted for each controlled axis.
  • Some control cards incorporate a CPU 1724 and on-board memory 1726 for the execution of programs and control algorithms.
  • the PMAC offered by Delta Tau and the DMC- 1700 by Galil Motion Control, Inc. of Mountain View, Calif, is typical of cards incorporating a CPU and memory.
  • the servo transducer 5 -axis PCB Assembly (part no. 415-0622-001), offered by Hurco Companies, Inc. of Indianapolis, Ind., may be used as the control card in the exemplary embodiment. This Hurco servo transducer does not have an onboard CPU and memory but utilizes the CPU and memory of the computer into which they are plugged for these services.
  • Figure 17 shows CPU 1724 and memory 1726 physically integrated on motion control card 1704.
  • a multi-tasking operating system like Windows XP offered by the Microsoft Corporation of Redmond Washington, may be employed for running the algorithms implementing this invention.
  • a real-time OS like RTX offered by Ready Systems of Sunnyvale, Calif, could also be used improving the run time performance of the algorithms as well.
  • the decision of what operating system to use and whether or not to employ multi-tasking paradigm depends on the application at hand and is a decision routinely made by those skilled in the art of computer system programming and design.
  • Contained in memory 1726 is a data area for storage of values relevant to the task at hand (1728, motion command and permitted feedrates; 1730, NC tolerance commands; 1732, feedrate limitation mappings; 1734, other data), as is commonly employed by people skilled in the art of programming.
  • Position sensors 171 Ox, 171 Oy, 171 Oz sense the positions of work piece 1702 in the x, y and z directions, respectively, as indicated by the dashed lines between the position sensors and the work piece in Figure 17. More particularly, in one embodiment, position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz sense the positions of three respective ballscrew mechanisms (not shown) that drive movable positioning slides (not shown) of the machine tool. The work piece is attached to one of the positioning slides, which, by the nature of the cascaded mounting approach of all of the positioning slides, permits the work piece to be moved in two directions, i.e., the x and y directions.
  • position sensor 171Oz may sense the position of the z-axis (third direction) ballscrew mechanism, which enables the linear position of the cutting tool along the z-axis to be deduced.
  • Position sensor 1710s senses the rotational position of cutting tool 1708, as indicated by the dashed line between position sensor 1710s and the cutting tool in Figure 17.
  • Position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz, 1710s may transmit associated position signals to CPU 1724 via connectors 1712, 1714, 1716, 1717.
  • position sensors 1710 may provide the Position Feedback depicted in Figure 1.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a method 2500 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12.
  • a target tool path is identified.
  • a target tool path from (1,4,0) to (5,1,6) is identified.
  • the tool is commanded to follow the target tool path from an initial position.
  • the tool may be commanded to follow the target tool path from initial position (1,4,0) to (5,1,6).
  • an actual position of the tool is sensed after the commanding step.
  • an actual position of the tool at point B is sensed.
  • a target tool subpath from the actual position is calculated to correct for predictive errors in movement of the tool.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates another method 2600 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12.
  • predictive errors in movement of the tool are empirically determined.
  • predictive errors in the movement of the tool may have been empirically determined through testing before the machine tool has arrived at (1,4,0) or before the machine tool has even gotten within proximity of the work piece.
  • the empirical determination may occur in a laboratory, in a manufacturing plant, or in a combination of both types of environments, for example.
  • the determination of the predictive errors may be dependent upon ambient temperature and/or humidity, for example.
  • step 2604 actual movements of the tool are monitored.
  • position sensors 1710 may sense the positions of machine tool 1708 and transmit associated position signals to CPU 1724 as described above.
  • step 2606 the actual movement of the tool are controlled dependent upon the empirically determined predictive errors and random errors in the actual movements of the tool.
  • the tool may be directed along target tool subpaths, such as subpath 1202, by servo amplifier 1706.
  • Figure 27 illustrates yet another method 2700 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12.
  • a first step 2702 an actual position of the tool after a first of a plurality of sequential movements is sensed.
  • position sensors 1710 may sense the position of machine tool 1708 after a movement of tool 1708.
  • a target position of the tool is calculated based on the sensing step. The target position is calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of the tool.
  • CPU 1724 may calculate target position T based upon position sensors 1710 sensing the position of machine tool 1708 at point B. Target position T may be calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of tool 1708.
  • Target position T may be calculated to maximize the probability of point C, i.e., the actual position after the servo, being on the target tool path between points (1,4,0) and (5,1,6) after the effects of the predictive errors during the servo.
  • the sensing and calculating steps are repeated for other movements of the tool. For example, the position of the tool at each of points C, D, E and F may be sensed and a new target position may be calculated after and based upon each of these sensing steps.
  • One embodiment of a method of trajectory motion control of the present invention is shown in pages 1-16 of the TBC Flowcharts and pages 1-5 of the TBC Kernel Flowcharts of the attached Appendix I.

Description

METHOD OF TOLERANCE-BASED TRAJECTORY PLANNING AND CONTROL
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention.
[0001] The present invention relates to navigation of a path by a moving object, and, more particularly, to motion control systems for computer-controllable machine tools.
2. Description of the Related Art.
[0002] Automation has resulted in the development of motion controllers capable of signaling actuator devices to effect motion in linkages along a desired trajectory while performing useful work. Motion controllers permit increased speed and precision in performing a given task over manual operation. Robots and automated manufacturing equipment are examples of a few of the products that utilize motion control technology. Programming these devices is often accomplished by specifying the desired trajectory as a collection of line/arc segments, along with the desired velocity of a tool along each segment. The velocity of the tool is often kept constant along each segment or group of segments of complex trajectories because velocity optimization along each point in the trajectory would be very time consuming.
[0003] Most humans who program tool trajectory have a fundamental understanding of the trade-off between velocity and accuracy. It is well known that at higher velocities it becomes more difficult for the control system to stay on the desired trajectory. Thus, trajectory programmers must make a trade-off between the velocity and the precision of motion along the desired trajectory. These decisions are often based on the programmer's experience and result in an iterative programming process wherein the trajectory is executed and then modified to reduce the velocity in sections where an undesirable deviation from the desired trajectory is observed. Thus, programmers control the deviation from the desired trajectory, and therefore the quality of the motion, by manipulating the tool velocity along the trajectory.
[0004] Motion control systems for manufacturing equipment, often referred to as Computer Numerical Controllers (CNCs), attempt to maximize the velocity of motion control while minimizing the deviation from the desired trajectory. CNCs may be used to control manufacturing equipment such as lathes, grinders and mills. CNCs are computing devices adapted for the real-time control of machine tools. A numerical controller receives a set of coded instructions that form a part program. Part programs are typically expressed in a standard G&M code language, or a close derivative of this language based on either the International Standards Organization (ISO) or the Electronics Industries Association (EIA) RS-274-D, using codes identified by letters such as G, M, or F. The codes define a sequence of machining operations to control motion in the manufacture of a part. The numerical controller converts the codes to a series of electrical signals which control motors attached to a machine tool effecting the motion of the tool along the programmed trajectory. [0005] A motion controller operating a milling machine is one example of CNC. Lathes, grinders and coordinate measuring machines. (CMMs) are other examples of manufacturing equipment which utilize a CNC for motion control. A three-axis CNC milling machine has a head where a tool is mounted, and a table movable relative to the tool in the X, Y plane. Motors control motion of the table in the X and Y directions and motion of tool in the Z direction, establishing an orthogonal X, Y, Z Cartesian coordinate system. Positional sensors (encoders or scales, typically) provide feedback indicating the position of the tool with respect to the coordinate system of the milling machine. The CNC reads in a part program specifying a tool path trajectory that the tool is to follow at a specified velocity or feedrate. The controller continuously compares the current tool position with the specified tool path. Using this feedback, the controller generates signals to control motors in such a way that the tool's actual trajectory matches the desired tool path or trajectory as closely as possible while the tool moves along the tool path at the desired velocity. The controller may be used in conjunction with a computer aided machining (CAM) system. [0006] The deviation of the actual tool trajectory from the desired trajectory or tool path is referred to as "machining error." The machining error may be computed as the distance between the instantaneous tool position and the desired trajectory as specified by the tool path. CNC tolerance is defined as the amount of the permitted machining error while machining. Motion controllers are expected to maintain good or tight CNC tolerance. The machining error depends on many factors including the performance of the motion controller and the feedrate selected for traversing the trajectory during machining. In general, higher feedrates will result in larger machining errors. [0007] Known part programs do not explicitly address CNC tolerance issues. The machine tool operator, part programmer or machinist must set feedrates to attempt to address these issues. In fact, tolerance cannot be expressed using known CNC programming languages, such as EIA RS-274-D, nor do existing motion controllers support the notion of constraining motion so that a CNC tolerance specification is met. One of the operator's functions is to select feedrates that would result in acceptable part quality, while simultaneously achieving high metal removal rates. The selection of appropriate feedrates is based on the operator's experience, and general rules of thumb may be obtained from numerous handbooks and charts (e.g., Machinery's Handbook, 24th edition, Industrial Press Inc., New York 1992). However, the figures from such documents, while perfectly feasible when used under the correct conditions, are frequently inappropriate when applied to specific machining situations. Published figures fail to account for local machining conditions such as sudden changes in the tool path, thereby leaving optimization of the feedrate to the operator. It is difficult for an operator to select feedrate values that achieve the desired part quality while maximizing the machine tool's productivity throughout the part program.
[0008] A tolerance based motion control system, including a method for setting feedrates based upon tolerance restraints, is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,242,880, which is incorporated herein by reference. While this patent represents a significant step forward in the art of motion control, refinements in the use of tolerance commands, E codes, and tolerance regions are needed in order to improve feedrates while still operating within the tolerance limits.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0009] The present invention applies smoothing to any trajectory of a motive body. For example, the present invention may be applied to smooth the trajectory of any motive body, such as a vehicle or projectile, regardless of whether the vehicle or projectile travels by land, sea or air. In a specific implementation of the present invention, the method may also be applied to adjust the feedrate of a CNC machine tool based on the CNC tolerance specified by the programmer and the programmed tool path, defining the maximum allowable feedrate at each point along the programmed trajectory. This information, along with position feedback, is used to modify the feedrate along the actual trajectory of motion to limit the position deviation from the ideal programmed path so that the requested CNC tolerance can be achieved.
[0010] Tolerance Based Control (TBC) Technology introduces the notion of CNC Tolerance to the programming and machining environment. It effectively allows the CNC programmer to program a part by using the maximum, or near maximum, permissible feedrates for a given cutting condition, i.e. cutter, speed, depth of cut, material conditions and so forth, and specify a desired CNC Tolerance.
[0011] The Tolerance Control may calculate feedrate limitations based on the CNC tolerance specified by the programmers and the programmed tool path, specifying the maximum, or near maximum, allowable feedrate at each point along the programmed trajectory. This information along with position feedback may be used to modify the feedrate along the actual trajectory of motion to limit position deviations from the ideally programmed path so that the requested CNC tolerance may be satisfied. [0012] Unlike the classical Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID) approach, which includes guessing where the cutter tool will be at various time intervals, the TBC approach may use Predictive Control techniques, which replaces non-TBC point-to-point fixed cycle control with trajectory and velocity based motion control. TBC may include looking at where the cutter tool is in relation to the programmed trajectory and adjusting accordingly, thereby eliminating the need for following error terms in the control loop. TBC continually processes machine tool position feedback along with the programmed trajectory and knowledge of a machine's capabilities to instantaneously issue a control signal that is responsive to the instantaneous machining conditions. Where a non-TBC PID control loop approximates the programmed trajectory by pulling the cutter tool from preplanned target to target using the following error, the TBC control pushes the cutter tool along the desired trajectory, correcting for deviations as they are encountered. TBC control may include controlling or adjusting movements of the tool based upon the current tracked position of the tool vis-a-vis a desired tool trajectory, rather than basing future tool movements solely upon where the tool should be at a certain point in time according to a pre-planned itinerary. [0013] In the "true arc" technology employed by the present invention, tool motion is controlled along a trajectory that is modeled as an arcuate path without polygon approximation. That is, the tool may be commanded to follow an arcuate trajectory rather than a trajectory formed by a series of linear segments that approximate a curved trajectory. By use of arcuate trajectories and associated vectors in real time instead of segment-based trajectories, TBC control may eliminate the conversion of arc trajectories into a straight-line approximation of the arc, allowing for the direct precision machining of arc segments, the elimination of the chord error, the reduction of part program size and the elimination of the processing required to convert complex trajectories into their polynomial approximations. [0014] The Data Smoothing technology in TBC control may include examining a target trajectory, for example a programmed NC tool trajectory identifying NC line segments which can be smoothed, and converting these NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance. Data Smoothing may include converting point-to-point linear moves into a sequence of mutually tangential arcs within allowed tolerances and with relatively small curvature changes. The extent of smoothing may be dependent on the specified tolerance. This technology has the benefit of achieving smoother trajectory, smoother velocity, acceleration, better feedrate control and improved surface finish. The smoothing technology is particularly important with legacy part programs expressing complex part geometry using polygon approximations.
[0015] The lookahead technology in TBC replaces non-TBC fixed buffer lookahead algorithms, reducing the possibility of data starvation, overshooting, tolerance breaching, dwell marks and poor surface finish on part products. Lookahead may ensure enough distance to accelerate or decelerate from one speed to another. When the length of a motion segment is relatively short and not enough for a large speed change, the lookahead algorithm may calculate and limit the speed of that motion segment according to some motion profile, such as an S-curve speed profile. Because lookahead is usually performed in real time and includes recursive modification of previously processed motion commands, the high efficiency of the algorithm may result in reduction of the CPU load and an improvement in machine performance. The recursive modification of motions may involve only logic and addition. Moreover, the algorithm may have the advantage of requiring fewer iterations of modifying previous commands. The algorithm may have a further advantage of improved run times which increases the system speed or throughput.
[0016] One option in a non-TBC Lookahead algorithm is to calculate a speed limit upon each instance of the motion distance being found insufficient to achieve a desired speed change. Such calculation of the speed limit may involve a large amount of computation. Repeatedly performing the calculation may be undesirable because of the processing time and resources required. The additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention may use a stop distance concept as a metric of speed limitation, which may be very computationally efficient.
[0017] The Soft-motion technology is the basis of the TBC control, which is easily updated and eliminates the need for costly PID based motion control cards. [0018] The TBC Prototype Software System may include Win32 components and Real Time Software System (RTSS) components. The term "Win32" refers to an application program interface (API) for running 32-bit Windows applications under Windows NT and Windows XP, as is commonly known, although other interfaces may be used with other underlying operating systems. Win32 Components may be interface modules for processing user requests, providing status information back to the users, updating graphics display, and converting a subset of G&M code into the required forms. Win32 components may include man-machine interface components and an interpreter of a subset of G&M code. The man- machine interface components may include display software and control panel processing. [0019] The machine I/O software components may include drivers for the servo transducer board. The Machine I/O Servo Driver may be responsible for taking the control signals generated by the TBC control and processing them into electrical signals effecting motion. This driver may also take feedback signals from the machine tool and convert them into information used by the TBC software.
[0020] RTSS Components may be coded within the RTSS, ensuring deterministic response. The RTSS components may include TBC components, machine I/O software components, and component integration and communication components. The TBC components may include tolerance understanding components, data compression components, data smoothing components, lookahead components, and motion kernel components. The TBC components may be functionally divided into two groups, i.e., a TBC data preprocessing group and a TBC motion control group including TBC motion kernel. The TBC data preprocessing group may include tolerance understanding components, data compression components, data smoothing components, and lookahead components. The TBC data preprocessing group may be implemented in a queue module. [0021] The smoothing function includes three phases: prepare for smoothing, adjust for smoothing and double arc smoothing. After the three phases of smoothing operations, point- to-point moves are converted into a sequence of mutually tangential arcs within allowed tolerance and with relatively small curvature changes.
[0022] The invention comprises, in one form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying three consecutive points of the path data. A first distance between a circular arc defined by the three points and a middle portion of a first line extending between a first of the points and a second of the points is ascertained. A second distance between the circular arc and a middle portion of a second line extending between the second point and a third of the points is ascertained. A turn angle between the first line and the second line is determined. Smoothing is performed on the second point if the first distance and/or the second distance is less than a threshold line distance, and the turn angle is greater than a threshold angle.
[0023] The invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of adjusting path data of a motive body, including identifying four consecutive points of the path data. The four consecutive points include a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point. It is determined whether the second point is suitable for smoothing. If the second point is suitable for smoothing, then a first arc and a second arc are located, and the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc. The first arc is defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point. The second arc is defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point. A line move associated with the second point is replaced with at least one arc move associated with the second point. [0024] The invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying four consecutive points of the path data. The four consecutive points include a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point. A first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point is located. A second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point is located. The second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc. [0025] The invention comprises, in a further form thereof, a method for adjusting path data for a motive body, including identifying a line move extending from a first point of the path data to a second point of the path data. The line move is replaced with a first arc move and a second arc move. The first arc move begins at the first point and terminates at a junction point. The second arc move begins at the junction point and terminates at the second point. [0026] The invention comprises, in still another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a motive body such as a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path, and determining a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points. A last maximum allowable speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained. An other maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established.
[0027] The invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path, and establishing a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual tool path from the target tool path. A degree of curvature of the target tool path at a plurality of locations along the target tool path is ascertained. A maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at each of the points along the target tool path is determined, wherein the maximum allowable tolerance speed is dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and the degree of curvature. A maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined. A last maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained. An other maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at each of the points other than the last point such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established. A lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable stopping speed at each of the points is identified. [0028] The invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method of processing path data for a machine tool, including identifying a plurality of points along a target tool path. Each selected two of the points being separated by a respective segment length. A maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined. A maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that a required stopping distance of the tool at the other point is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point and the segment length between the other point and the last point is ascertained.
[0029] The invention comprises, in a further form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including identifying a target tool path. The tool is commanded to follow the target tool path from an initial position. A first actual position of the tool is sensed after the commanding step. A first target tool subpath from the first actual position is calculated to correct for predictive errors in movement of the tool.
[0030] The invention comprises, in still another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including empirically determining predictive errors in movement of the tool. Actual movements of the tool are monitored. The actual movements of the tool are controlled dependent upon the empirically determined predictive errors and random errors in the actual movements of the tool.
[0031] The invention comprises, in a still further form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool having a plurality of sequential movements, including sensing an actual position of the tool after a first of the movements of the tool. A target position of the tool is calculated based on the sensing step. The target position is calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of the tool. The sensing and calculating steps are repeated for other ones of the movements of the tool. [0032] The invention comprises, in yet another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including sensing an actual position of the tool. A position error between the actual position of the tool and a desired position of the tool is calculated. The position error is compared to a specified error tolerance. A speed of the tool is adjusted dependent upon the comparing step.
[0033] The invention comprises, in another form thereof, a method of operating a machine tool, including sensing an actual position of the tool along each of a plurality of axes. A multi-dimensional position error between the actual position of the tool in each of the axes and a multi-dimensional reference trajectory is calculated. A multi-dimensional position error signal is produced dependent upon the calculating step. A speed and/or a direction of the tool are controlled dependent upon the multi-dimensional position error signal. [0034] An advantage of the present invention is that it provides improved trajectories or tool paths for the machine tool. More particularly, the tool paths are smoother, thereby permitting higher feedrates and providing smoother surfaces on the work piece.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0035] The above mentioned and other features and objects of this invention, and the manner of attaining them, will become more apparent and the invention itself will be better understood by reference to the following description of an embodiment of the invention taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein:
[0036] Figure 1 is a flow chart of one embodiment of a tolerance based control method of the present invention.
[0037] Figure 2 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a tolerance based control system of the present invention.
[0038] Figure 3a is a diagram illustrating the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space.
[0039] Figure 3b is a diagram illustrating a first case of another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space. [0040] Figure 3 c is a diagram illustrating a second case of another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space. [0041] Figure 3d is a diagram illustrating yet another embodiment of the mapping of different tolerance values to different regions of machining space in the case of an arc. [0042] Figure 4a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of data compression according to one embodiment of the present invention. [0043] Figure 4b is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of data compression according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[0044] Figure 5a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of selecting data points for data smoothing according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0045] Figure 5b is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of selecting data points for data smoothing according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[0046] Figure 6a is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of adjusting line moves for smoothing according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0047] Figure 6b is a perspective view of a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of adjusting line moves for smoothing according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[0048] Figure 7 is an enlarged plot of the middle two points of Figure 6a.
[0049] Figure 8 is a plot of the program data points of Figure 6a along with one subsequent program data point, illustrating a next step of the method of Figure 6a for adjusting line moves for smoothing.
[0050] Figure 9 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of smoothing data using a double arc algorithm according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0051] Figure 10 is a plot of the tool velocity versus time, also referred to as the S-Curve.
[0052] Figure 11 is a plot of a segment length extending between two consecutive points along a tool path.
[0053] Figure 12 is a plot illustrating the deviations of an actual tool path from a desired tool path.
[0054] Figure 13 is a plot of control loop cycle time for the servo signals in one embodiment of the present invention.
[0055] Figure 14 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of predictive error correction according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0056] Figure 15 is a plot of program data points, illustrating a method of random error correction according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[0057] Figure 16 is a flow chart illustrating a method of the present invention for executing a motion kernel. [0058] Figure 17 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a machine of the present invention for machining a work piece.
[0059] Figure 18 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 5.
[0060] Figure 19 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figures 6 and 7.
[0061] Figure 20 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 9.
[0062] Figure 21 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figures 5 through 9.
[0063] Figure 22 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
[0064] Figure 23 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
[0065] Figure 24 is a flow chart of yet another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 11.
[0066] Figure 25 is a flow chart of one embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
[0067] Figure 26 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
[0068] Figure 27 is a flow chart of yet another embodiment of the method of the present invention illustrated in Figure 12.
[0069] Figure 28a is a graphical representation of Level 0 data smoothing.
[0070] Figure 28b is a graphical representation of Level 1 data smoothing.
[0071] Figure 28c is a graphical representation of Level 2 data smoothing.
[0072] Figure 28d is a graphical representation of Level 3 data smoothing.
[0073] Figure 28e is a graphical representation of Level 4 data smoothing.
[0074] Figure 29 is a plot illustrating one step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention. [0075] Figure 30 is a plot illustrating another step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention.
[0076] Figure 31 is a plot illustrating yet another step of one embodiment of a double arc smoothing algorithm of the present invention.
[0077] Figure 32a is another plot of the tool velocity versus time, also referred to as an S-
Curve.
[0078] Figure 32b is a diagram indicating how distances are related to the plot of Figure
32a.
[0079] Figure 33 is a diagram illustrating the concept of stop distance.
[0080] Figure 34 is yet another plot of the tool velocity versus time for both additive and non-additive lookahead algorithms.
[0081] Figure 35a is a flow chart of one embodiment of an additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention.
[0082] Figure 35b is a flow chart of one embodiment of a non-additive lookahead algorithm.
[0083] Figure 36 is a table comparing the kinematic characteristics of a non-additive lookahead algorithm and a TBC additive lookahead algorithm.
[0084] Figure 37 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a non-TBC motion control arrangement of the present invention.
[0085] Figure 38a is a plot of a reference trajectory y=x.
[0086] Figure 38b is a plot of the reference trajectory of Figure 38a decomposed into a time-based y-axis trajectory y=kt.
[0087] Figure 38c is a plot of the reference trajectory of Figure 38a decomposed into a time-based x-axis trajectory x=kt.
[0088] Figure 38d is a plot of actual trajectories resulting from the reference trajectories of
Figures 38a-c.
[0089] Figure 39 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a TBC motion control arrangement of the present invention.
[0090] Figure 40 is another block diagram of the TBC motion control arrangement of
Figure 39. [0091] Figure 41 is a plot illustrating the calculation of the stopper plane normal direction for line motion.
[0092] Figure 42 is a plot illustrating the calculation of the stopper plane normal direction for arc motion.
[0093] Figure 43 is a plot illustrating line motion geometry analysis.
[0094] Figure 44a is a first plot illustrating arc motion geometry analysis.
[0095] Figure 44b is a second plot illustrating arc motion geometry analysis.
[0096] Figure 45 is a flow chart illustrating operation of one embodiment of a TBC S-
Curve Controller.
[0097] Figure 46 is a block diagram illustrating one embodiment of a TBC feed forward control arrangement of the present invention.
[0098] Figure 47 is a block diagram illustrating one embodiment of an arrangement of the present invention for variable-gain feedback control of normal error.
[0099] Corresponding reference characters indicate corresponding parts throughout the several views. Although the drawings represent embodiments of the present invention, the drawings are not necessarily to scale and certain features may be exaggerated in order to better illustrate and explain the present invention. The exemplification set out herein illustrates an embodiment of the invention, in one form, and such exemplifications are not to be construed as limiting the scope of the invention in any manner.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PRESENT INVENTION
[00100] Referring now to the drawings and particularly to Figure 1, there is shown one embodiment of a tolerance based control method 100 of the present invention, including the performance of the major functions of a tolerance based controller of the present invention as it machines the part defined by the part program. While the controller of this disclosed embodiment relates to a particular case of the present invention, dealing with CNC machine controls, the invention may be generally applied to motive bodies having various motion control situations as one of skill in the art would recognize, such as robotic control, vehicular control, projectile control, and the like.
[00101] In a first step 102, the controller receives part data from the part program. The part program may include data specifying the dimensions, shape, and other physical characteristics of the part or "work piece" to be machined. In general, a trajectory preprocessing step 104 includes calculating a desired tool path and feedrates that the machine tool should follow in order to produce the part within a relatively short period of time and within dimensional tolerance constraints. As the part is machined, position feedback specifying the actual position of the machine tool is used in a predictive and random error compensation step 106 to modify servo commands to redirect the machine tool to compensate for, i.e., correct, both predictive or repeatable errors and random or non- repeatable errors in the actual machine tool path as compared to the commanded tool path. In a final step 108, the modified servo command is transmitted to the servo amplifier for use in actuating the machine tool.
[00102] The method of Figure 1 is now described in more detail with reference to the flow diagram of Figure 2. In general, steps 102 and 104 correspond to the Queue Manager Task of Figure 2, and steps 106 and 108 correspond to the Run System Task of Figure 2. The part program may provide the locations of discrete points on the surface of the part, and the Numerical Control may interpolate between these discrete points to thereby define a desired trajectory or tool path formed of contiguous lines and arcs. As used herein, the term "arc" may indicate a segment of a circle. That is, the arc may have a constant radius. The quality of the data in the user part program may be directly linked to the quality of the cutting results on a machine tool. Data of poor quality often results in a part surface that is not smooth.
[00103] The Queue Manager Task preprocesses the part program motion data with four consecutive operations that transform it into high quality motion data before the Run System Task executes it. The four operations are Tolerance Understanding within Tolerance Queue 202, Data Compression within Compression Queue 204, Data Smoothing within Smoothing Queue 206, and Additive Lookahead within Lookahead Queue 208. The queue manager may perform the corresponding data processing on each queue and move the data flow through the consecutive queues in a pipeline manner. The data processing includes the tolerance understanding operation on the tolerance queue, the data compressing operation on the compression queue, the smoothing operation on the smoothing queue, and the lookahead operation on the lookahead queue. [00104] The queue module may preprocess NC motion commands such as positioning (GOO), line (GOl), arc (G02, G03), and an NC tolerance command E used for the tolerance based control. Use of the TBC technology is consistent with existing or legacy CNC part programs. This technology allows the operator to specify NC tolerance commands along with the existing NC commands for execution. By inserting a new NC Tolerance Command within an existing G&M code part program, the CNC programmer can specify different CNC Tolerance constraints.
[00105] The NC tolerance commands specify a region and a tolerance value to be applied to that region along with a command identification number. An NC tolerance command is defined as an E code:
E tol XxI YyI ZzI Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 lid
[00106] An E code requests that a three-dimensional rectangular region defined by the coordinates of the diagonal corners (xl, yl, zl) and (x2, y2, z2), xl<x2, yl<y2, zl<z2, hold a non-zero NC tolerance value of tol. This specific tolerance command may be identified by an integer value id.
[00107] It is possible for multiple E codes to define overlapping tolerance regions. One point may belong to a number of active NC tolerance regions. In this case, the NC tolerance value at the point is defined as the tolerance value specified in the latest E code whose region covers this point.
[00108] In a tolerance mapping operation within tolerance queue 202, tolerance values are assigned to each line or arc within the tool path. The tolerance mapping operation processes variable tolerance regions that are defined in the part program and assigns the required tolerances to each motion move. Tolerance regions having different values may overlap one another, as shown in Figure 3a. Three areas 302, 304, 306 have respective tolerances specified as 0.001 inch, 0.0005 inch, and 0.0003 inch. As a move such as from P0 to Pj crosses multiple tolerance regions, the move is split into multiple moves, i.e., from P0 to Pi', from Pi' to Pi", and from Pj" to Pi, with each move having a different tolerance value. The tolerance command E codes in a part program may specify regions and tolerance values to be applied to those regions in the part. The motion commands in the part program may fall into different tolerance regions. Tolerance understanding may identify the correct tolerance value required for each motion command according to the programmed E codes. [00109] In processing a tolerance command, if the command is a new tolerance specification, a space may be created for a new item in a tolerance table. In the tolerance table, tolerance values are mapped to respective tolerance regions. Then, the new item may be filled in with the tolerance specification extracted from the command. Finally, the new item may be inserted at the beginning of the tolerance table. After being processed, a tolerance command may be discarded, because the information from the command has been stored in the tolerance table.
[00110] In processing a line command or an arc command, the required tolerance value for the command may be calculated and attached to the command. The E codes may specify different tolerance regions, and each line or arc of the NC program may belong to one or more of these tolerance regions. The algorithm for determining the required tolerance for each line or arc may include checking the tolerance of some sample points on the line or arc. If a line or arc lies in one tolerance region, the sample points will have the same tolerance, which will be the required tolerance for this line or arc. On the other hand, if a line or arc lies across more than one tolerance region, the sample points will have different tolerances. In this case, the line will be divided into segments based on the sample points, with each line segment having a unique required tolerance. By the same token, an arc may be segmented by different tolerances, however, the arc will not be divided. The tightest tolerance value will be chosen as the required tolerance for this arc instead.
[00111] A routine may be used to determine the required tolerance for a given point. It performs the following operations: 1) take the position of the given point as a key value; 2) starting from the beginning, search the tolerance table for the E code whose tolerance region covers the key value (i.e., the given point is located within the tolerance region); and 3) assign the tolerance value of the E code first found as the required tolerance for the given point.
[00112] If a point belongs to several tolerance regions specified by different tolerance commands, the latest tolerance command is in control. A new tolerance command is always inserted at the beginning of the tolerance table. Therefore, in the above operation, the first found E code is the latest E code which specifies the required tolerance for the given point.
[00113] Another routine may be used to divide a line into segments according to multiple tolerance specifications. Yet another routine may be used to determine the tightest tolerance among the multiple tolerance specifications on an arc.
[00114] Another embodiment of tolerance regions having different values and overlapping one another is illustrated in Figures 3b-c, Figure 3b illustrating a first case, and Figure 3 c illustrating a second case. In this embodiment, for purposes of computational efficiency, a line move may be divided into at most two lines. Only one more point, point p', is generated between points p0 and pi.
[00115] In the case of an arc (Figure 3d), three equidistant points t2, t3, t4, are added between an arc starting point tl and an end point t5. The lowest of the tolerances of the five points defines the tolerance of the arc, as indicated by the equation
Al.tol = min {tl, t2, t3, t4, t5}.
[00116] After the tolerance understanding operation, the elements to be taken from tolerance queue 202 and sent to compression queue 204 are: positioning commands, line commands with required tolerance attached, arc commands with required tolerance attached, and the program end command.
DATA COMPRESSION
[00117] In a data compression operation within compression queue 204, the program data is compressed. In many part programs, there are short line moves that result in a poor surface finish on the part. It is possible to combine some of these short lines into longer lines, which may improve the part quality. The data compression operation may determine whether short lines can be combined into longer lines, and the data compression operation may perform such data compression if it is possible to do so. In a data compression operation illustrated in Figure 4a, points Pi and P2 are eliminated and a new line is formed from point Po to point P3. Tolerance boundaries or constraints on the tool path are indicated by dashed lines 402, 404. Tolerance boundaries 402, 404 may be smaller by an order of magnitude than user-defined numerical control tolerances by E code. [00118] A line command is a point-to-point move. Combining short line moves into a longer one may include determining a starting point and an end point among the target point sequence for a new line move and removing all the intermediate points. The new, longer line move can replace the old short line moves only if some conditions are met, including the tolerance condition, i.e., the distance from each of the removed points to the new line is within a given tolerance.
[00119] To do data compression, all line commands may be sequentially examined in compression queue 204. The compression operation may process point-to-point moves in the following steps: 1) examine a sequence of point-to-point moves with the consecutive target points p0, pi, p2, p3, ... , pn-i, pn; and 2) remove the points between po andpn in the sequence, i.e., pi, p2, p3, ... , pn-i, if the following conditions are all met:
• For all i (1 <= i < n), the distance from p; to the straight line connecting po and pn is less than a given tolerance
• For all i (1 <= i < n), the perpendicular projection point of p; on the line connecting p0 and pn is located between po and pn.
• For all i (0 <= i <= n), the line command with p; as the end position have the same tolerance value
• The distance from p0 to pn is bounded by a predetermined length [00120] Thus, the line move from po to pn replaces n shorter line moves. After the compression operation, the elements in compression queue 204 may be more compact since some consecutive short lines have merged. All the elements in compression queue 204, including positioning commands, compressed line commands, arc commands, and the program end command, are sent to smoothing queue 206.
[00121] In another data compression embodiment, four tests or criteria are used to determine whether a next point should be added to the compression queue, or whether compression should be performed on only the points that are presently in the compression queue. In the illustration of Figure 4b, assume that points pθ, pi, p2 and p3 have already been found to meet the compression criteria, and that it is being determined whether point p4 should be added to the compression queue, or whether compression should be performed on only points pθ, pi, p2 and p3. The four compression criteria may be as follows: Test 1: |p4-p0|<0.05 inch.
Test 2: For p3, the angle θ is between -90 degrees and 90 degrees.
Test 3: pO.tol = pl.tol = p2.tol = p3.tol = p4.tol. That is, an equal tolerance has been assigned to each point from the tolerance table.
Test 4: The perpendicular distances from pi, p2 and p3 to the line pθp4 are less than the specified tolerance.
[00122] If the above four tests are satisfied, then p4 is added to the compression queue. If the above four tests are not satisfied, then p3 is added to the smoothing queue and pi and p2 are discarded in compression. Essentially, three segments (pOpl, plp2 and p2p3) are combined into one segment (pθp3).
DATA SMOOTHING
[00123] Data smoothing operations convert NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance. The data smoothing may advantageously result in smoother velocity and acceleration, better control of feedrates, improved surface finish, and full utilization of the TBC true arc technology.
[00124] The following different smoothing levels may be provided: Level 0, including no smoothing and producing a cut polygon; Level 1, in which arcs replace lines, and arcs may not be connected to each other in most cases; Level 2, in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, and arcs are not tangential to each other in most cases; Level 3, in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, and arcs are tangential to each other; and Level 4 (a smoothing level that may be provided by the present invention), in which arcs replace lines, arcs are connected to each other, arcs are tangential to each other, and arc curvatures change gradually. The preparatory smoothing operation, the corrective smoothing operation, and the double arc smoothing may be performed on the smoothing queue simultaneously and in a pipeline manner.
[00125] Figures 28a-e illustrate level 0, level 1, level 2, level 3, and level 4 smoothing, respectively. In level 0-3 smoothing, the output of smoothing, the final trajectory, always passes through the data points. In Figure 28d, cl and rl are the center and radius of the arc defined by the points pθ, pi and p2; and c2 and r2 are the center and radius of the arc defined by the points p2, p3 and p4. The curvature of an arc is defined as the inverse of the radius (1/r). Thus, in the level 3 example of Figure 28d, the relatively large radius change from rl to r2 results in a correspondingly large curvature change between the two arcs. [00126] Level 4 is different from the other smoothing levels in the sense that the data points are adjusted (within the specified tolerance) to achieve gradual curvature changes. This adjustment of the data points is acceptable in applications such as the multi-axis contouring (or metal cutting using CNC machines) because the adjustments are very small (typically less than 0.0005 inch) and are within a specified tolerance. [00127] The points may be adjusted, both in direction and magnitude, to achieve gradual curvature changes such that the trajectory approaches being elliptical. Gradual change of curvature along the trajectory may facilitate motion control. Gradual change of curvature may be characterized by the curvature changing, or at least possibly changing, after each point along the trajectory. As shown in Figure 28e, the radius of curvature becomes incrementally smaller along the trajectory from p0 to p4. That is, the radii become smaller with each point along the trajectory. In Figure 28d, in contrast, the radius of curvature drops in one large step as the trajectory passes through p2. However, it may also be possible within level 4 smoothing for the curvature to be the same on either side of a point. As indicated by the overlapping points in Figure 28e, the points may be adjusted or moved such that the trajectory approaches an elliptical path. However, the points may be adjusted only within a specified tolerance.
[00128] Motion of a tool along an arc requires a force, referred to as "centripetal force", directed toward the center of the arc. In the case of CNC machines, this force may be provided by the motors. Sudden and relatively large changes in the centripetal forces (as the motion moves from one arc to the next) may result in larger overshoots, which may be detrimental to the resulting surface finish.
[00129] Figure 28e illustrates minor adjustments to the positions of points p0 to p4 as compared to their earlier positions as shown in Figure 28d. The minor adjustments may result in the points defining a trajectory that approaches being elliptical. An elliptical trajectory may be ideal or optimal because, along an ellipse, the curvature changes continuously. However, how large an adjustment, or much of an adjustment, that is allowed within the scope of the invention may depend upon the tolerance. Thus, the points may not actually fall on an ellipse after the adjustments.
[00130] In one embodiment of the present invention, instead of optimizing the curvature changes, a sub-optimal solution is employed such that the trajectory includes only circular arcs as opposed to being elliptical. Defining the trajectory as a series of circular arcs may have the advantage of reducing the computational/mathematical complexity of calculating the point adjustments. Thus, even if it is possible to achieve an elliptical trajectory by adjusting the points within tolerances, the points are instead adjusted such that the trajectory is defined by a series of circular arcs in one embodiment of the present invention. [00131] In one embodiment, the motion control is implemented in a 200 usec loop, i.e., the motion control is updated every 200 usec. Thus, there is a need for computations to be performed efficiently such that the computations may be performed every 200 micro seconds. Due to limitations in the speed of a processor which may perform several other operations in addition to motion control, using a trajectory defined by a series of circular arcs (gradual changes in curvature) rather than an elliptical trajectory (continuous change of curvature) may be helpful in updating the motion control with a particular frequency, such as every 200 usec.
[00132] Data smoothing may include three phases or operations, namely preparing for smoothing, adjusting for smoothing, and smoothing using a double arc algorithm. In a first operation of a smoothing method of the present invention, line data is identified for smoothing. It is not always feasible to convert NC line data into arcs while maintaining a given tolerance, as with, for example, connected lines with sharp angles. It is sometimes not desirable to smooth NC line data, for example, long line moves. Certain conditions may need to be satisfied before raw line data can be smoothed. The first operation examines the original line data identifying the line segments, which meet the conditions for smoothing.
Prepare for Smoothing
[00133] During the first operation, all line move target points are sequentially examined in the smoothing queue. The line segments, which can be smoothed, are determined and the target points of all these lines may be tagged as "smoothing" or "no smoothing". [00134] Let pi, p2, and p3 be three consecutive target points in the smoothing queue. The point p2 may be tagged as "smoothing" if the following conditions are all met:
• The motion from pi to p2 is a line move
• The motion from p2 to p3 is a line move
• The length from pi to p2 is bounded by a constant
• The length from p2 to p3 is bounded by a constant
• The perpendicular distance from pi to line p2p3 is bounded by a constant
• The perpendicular distance from p3 to line pφ2 is bounded by a constant
• The angle between line pip2 and line p2p3 is bounded by a constant
[00135] Otherwise, the point p2 may be tagged as "no smoothing". The line elements in smoothing queue 206 processed by the first operation may be all tagged. In one embodiment, the length from pi to p2 and the length from p2 to p3 are both bounded by a constant of approximately between 1 cm and 2 cm; the perpendicular distance from pi to line p2p3 is bounded by a constant of approximately between 20% and 40% of the length from p2 to p3; the perpendicular distance from p3 to line pip2 is bounded by a constant of approximately between 20% and 40% of the length from pi to p2; and the angle between line pip2 and p2p3 is bounded by a constant approximately between 135° and 165°. [00136] In a data smoothing operation within smoothing queue 206, line data is converted into arcs that are connected and tangent to one another and that have gradually changing curvature or radius. This provides smoother motion velocity and acceleration that results in a better part surface finish. The process of data smoothing includes a preparing for smoothing step 210 (Figure 2), an adjusting for smoothing step 212, and a double arc smoothing step 214. Smoothing preparation step 210 includes identifying data points for smoothing. As illustrated in Figure 5a, point Pi may be suitable for smoothing, and thus may be marked for smoothing, if the length of the moves P0 to P1 and Pi to P2, and an angle 502 between these moves, are below specified limits. A maximum distance that point P0 can be disposed from point P1 while keeping the length of the move P0 to P1 below specified limits is indicated by dashed line 504. Similarly, a maximum distance that point P2 can be disposed from point Pi while keeping the length of the move Pi to P2 below specified limits is indicated by dashed line 506. Although the distance from Pi indicated by dashed line 504 is smaller than the distance from P1 indicated by dashed line 506, these distances may be equal. In one embodiment, point Pi may be suitable for smoothing if the length of the moves Po to P1 and P1 to P2, i.e., the first line distance between points P0 and P1 and the second line distance between points Pj to P2, are both below a limit or threshold line distance of approximately between one centimeter and two centimeters, and turn angle 502 is above a limit or threshold angle approximately between 135° and 165°. [00137] In another embodiment, a further requirement for marking point Pi for smoothing is that the perpendicular distance from point Po to line PiP2, and the perpendicular distance from point P2 to line P0Pi, are below specified limits or threshold perpendicular distances. In one embodiment, point Pi may be marked for smoothing if the perpendicular distance d0 from point P0 to line P1P2 is less than approximately between 20% and 40% of the length of line PiP2, and if the perpendicular distance d2 from point P2 to line PoPi is less than approximately between 20% and 40% of the length of line PoPi.
[00138] In yet another embodiment, which is illustrated in Figure 5b, three points pθ, pi, p2 are joined by an arc. A distance dl is the shortest distance between a middle portion of line segment pOpl and the arc pθplp2; and a distance d2 is the shortest distance between the middle portion of line segment plp2 and the arc pθplp2. In one embodiment, distance dl is the shortest distance between a midpoint of line segment pOpl and the arc pθplρ2; and a distance d2 is the shortest distance between the midpoint of line segment plp2 and the arc pθplp2. A middle one of the three points, i.e., point pi, may be marked for smoothing if the following three conditions or criteria are satisfied:
Test 1: Both pOpl and plp2 are lines.
Test 2: Max{dl,d2} < 0.0005 inch. That is, both dl and d2 are less than some predetermined distance approximately between 0.0002 and 0.001 inch, such as 0.0005 inch.
Test 3: The angle θ > 145 degrees, or some other predetermined angle approximately between 130 degrees and 160 degrees.
If the three above conditions are not met, then point pi may not be marked for smoothing. [00139] Figure 18 illustrates a method 1800 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 5b. In a first step 1802, three consecutive points of a data path are identified. For example, points pθ, pi and p2 may be identified. In step 1804, a first line distance between a first of the points and a second of the points and/or a second line distance between the second point and a third of the points are ascertained. More particularly, a first line distance 518 between points pO and pi, and a second line distance 520 between points pi and p2 is ascertained. In a next step 1806, a turn angle between a first line extending between the first point and the second point and a second line extending between the second point and the third point is determined. In the example of Figure 5b, a turn angle θ between the line extending between points pO and pi and the line extending between points pi and p2 is determined. As indicated in steps 1808, 1810 and 1812, smoothing is performed on the second point if the first line distance and/or the second line distance is less than a threshold line distance, and the turn angle is greater than a threshold turn angle. That is, smoothing may be performed on point pi if first line distance 518 and/or second line distance 520 is less than a threshold line distance, and turn angle θ is greater than a threshold turn angle. Else, another three consecutive data points of the data path may be identified, as indicated in step 1802. For example, consecutive points pi, p2 and a next point p3 (not shown) may be identified.
Adjust for Smoothing
[00140] In a second operation, line data is adjusted for smoothing. The second operation may reduce the curvature changes on a three-dimensional curve represented by a sequence of three-dimensional points. The local curvature at a given point on such a curve is mainly determined by neighboring points. A minor change of the position of the given point or of its neighboring points may significantly change the local curvature. Thus, it is possible to modify the positions of points within the given tolerance such that the curvature changes on the three-dimensional curve represented by the modified points will be reduced. The smaller the curvature changes on the curve, the smoother the curve may be. [00141] The second operation may include sequentially checking a group of four consecutive line target points already processed by the first operation in smoothing queue 206 and adjusting the positions of middle points to modify the local curvature. Let pi, p2, p3 and p4 be four consecutive line target points processed by the first operation in smoothing queue 206. Assume that points p2 and p3 are both tagged "smoothing", then these two middle points will be slightly moved. The algorithm for adjusting point positions as illustrated in Figure 6 may include the following steps: 1) create an arc ARCi34 passing through points pi, p3 and p4; 2) create an arc ARC124 passing through points pi, p2 and p4; 3) move point p2 towards arc ARC134 and keep the moving distance within the given tolerance; and 4) move point p3 towards arc ARCj24 and keep the moving distance within the given tolerance.
[00142] The positional adjustment proceeds continuously with groups of four consecutive points.
[00143] After one group is adjusted, the successive group that consists of the last three points in the previous group and a new target point of the next line element will be processed. The target points of line elements in smoothing queue 206 processed by the second operation are moved (within the given tolerance range) so that the curvatures at these points change more smoothly, i.e., less drastically, than they did before the second operation.
[00144] Step 212 includes adjusting line moves for smoothing. The line moves may be adjusted relative to each other to control the path curvature and to prepare for arc fitting. In the illustration in Figure 6a, two construction arcs 602, 604 are located that pass through points P0PiP3 and P0P2P3, respectively. Points Pi and P2 may both be moved into an area between construction arcs 602, 604. Points Pi and P2 are moved closer to one another such that point P2 is moved approximately midway between construction arcs 602, 604, and point Pi is moved a lesser distance toward construction arc 604. That is, point Pi may not be moved so far as to be positioned midway between construction arcs 602, 604. Rather, point Pi may be moved less than half of the distance to the opposite construction arc 604. More particularly, point P1 may be moved a distance equal to a factor between 0 and 0.5 multiplied by a spacing Si (Figure 7) between the point P1 and the opposite construction arc 604. The factor may be less than 0.45. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 6a, the factor is approximately between 0.18 and 0.20, which has been established mathematically as providing favorable results.
[00145] Figure 7 is an enlarged view that illustrates with more precision the direction and distance of the movement of points Pj and P2 in one embodiment. A line 702 intersects point P2 and is tangent to arc 604 at point P2. A spacing S2 is defined between point P2 and arc 602 in a direction perpendicular to line 702. Point P2 may be moved a distance equal to a factor between 0.45 and 0.55 multiplied by spacing S2 in a direction perpendicular to line 702. In the embodiment illustrated in Figures 6a and 7, the factor is approximately 0.50. Similarly, a line 704 intersects point P1 and is tangent to arc 602 at point P1- A spacing S1 is defined between point P1 and arc 604 in a direction perpendicular to line 704. Point Pi may be moved a distance of approximately 0.19 multiplied times spacing Si in a direction perpendicular to line 704.
[00146] The process may then be repeated for each successive move in the programmed path. Figure 8 illustrates a repetition of the process after a next point P4 has been identified. Two construction arcs 802, 804 are defined that pass through points PiP2P4 and PiP3P4, respectively. Points P2 and P3 are then moved by factors of 0.19 and 0.50, respectively, in a manner substantially similar to the movements of points P1 and P2 in Figures 6a and 7. [00147] Figure 6b illustrates another embodiment of the present invention for adjusting line moves for smoothing. The line moves may be adjusted relative to each other to control the path curvature and to prepare for arc fitting. Two construction arcs 612, 614, which are not coplanar, are located that pass through points P0PiP3 and P0P2P3, respectively. A line of intersection of the planes of arcs 612, 614 is designated 616. The center of a circle defined by arc 612 is designated c2; and the center of a circle defined by arc 614 is designated cl. A projection of point pi on the plane of arc 614 is designated point ql. That is, a line that extends through both of points pi and ql is perpendicular to the plane of arc 614. Similarly, a projection of point p2 on the plane of arc 612 is designated point q2. That is, a line that extends through both of points p2 and q2 is perpendicular to the plane of arc 612. The closest point on arc 614 to point pi is designated si; and the closest point on arc 612 to point p2 is designated s2.
[00148] Generally, a point is adjusted if both that point and an adjacent point have been marked for smoothing. A point may be marked for smoothing if it satisfies each of the three tests or conditions given above, i.e., both pOpl and plp2 are lines; Max{dl,d2} < 0.0005 inch; and angle θ > 143.2 degrees. In the example shown in Figure 6b, point pi may be adjusted if pi has been marked for smoothing and either or both of p0 and p2 has been marked for smoothing. Point pi may be adjusted, if at all, along an adjustment vector vl extending from pi to si. Similarly, point p2 may be adjusted if p2 has been marked for smoothing and either or both of pi and p3 has been marked for smoothing. Point p2 may be adjusted, if at all, along an adjustment vector v2 extending from p2 to s2. [00149] After the adjustments associated with arcs 612 and 614, the process continues with subsequent adjustments associated with arcs formed by the next set of four points, i.e., points pi, p2, p3 and p4. That is, adjustments may be made based upon an arc defined by points pi, p2 and p4 and an arc defined by points pi, p3 and p4. As with the embodiment of Figures 6a and 7, the adjustment process may continue indefinitely with calculations based upon subsequent sets of four points along the trajectory.
[00150] The magnitude of the adjustment of a point's position along an adjustment vector may be dependent upon whether one of the two adjacent points is unmarked for smoothing. More particularly, if a marked point lies immediately after or before an unmarked point, i.e., the marked point lies between an unmarked point and another marked point, then the position of the marked point may be adjusted by half the length of the adjustment vector. That is, the marked point may be moved halfway along the adjustment vector. In equation form, the position of the point may be calculated as p = p+0.5*v. That is, the point is moved with a coefficient or factor of 0.5. Otherwise, if a marked point lies between two other marked points, then the position of the point is adjusted twice with a coefficient or factor of approximately 0.19 in each of the two adjustments. In the first adjustment, the direction and magnitude of the adjustment vector is determined with the adjusted point being the second of the four points used in the calculations illustrated in Figure 6b. In the second adjustment, the direction and magnitude of the adjustment vector is determined with the adjusted point being the third of the four points.
[00151] Adjustment factors of 0.19 and 0.5 are discussed above in conjunction with the embodiment of Figure 6b. However, as with the embodiment of Figures 6a and 7, these factors may lie within respective ranges of 0.18 to 0.20 and 0.45 to 0.55. [00152] The total magnitude of the adjustment of a point may be limited by a constant value. In one embodiment, the total distance of adjustment is limited to 0.0002 inch. If the calculated total adjustment is greater than 0.0002 inch, then the actual implemented adjustment is set to 0.0002 inch in the direction of the calculated adjustment. [00153] To better illustrate the embodiment of Fig. 6b, various adjustment scenarios are described below. The check to verify that the total adjustment is less than an adjustment limit, such as 0.0002 inch, is omitted for simplicity and ease of illustration.
Case 1:
Condition: p0 is not marked for smoothing; pi is marked for smoothing; p2 is not marked for smoothing.
Result: Because pi is not adjacent another marked point, pi is not adjusted even though it is marked for smoothing .
Case 2:
Condition: p0 is not marked for smoothing; pi and p2 are marked for smoothing; p3 is not marked for smoothing.
Result: pi = pl+0.5*vl; ρ2=p2+0.5*v2.
Case 3:
Condition: p0 is not marked for smoothing; pi, p2 and p3 are marked for smoothing; p4 is not marked for smoothing.
Result: pi = pl+0.5*vl; p2=p2+0.1877*v2+0.1877v2'; p3 = p3+0.5*v3, wherein vl and v2 are calculated from points pθplp2p3, and points v2' and v3 are calculated from points plp2p3p4.
Case 4:
Condition: p0 is not marked for smoothing; pi, p2, p3 and p4 are marked for smoothing. Result: pi = pl+0.5*vl; p2=p2+0.1877*v2+0.1877v2l; p3 = p3+0.1877*v3+0.1877v3', wherein vl and v2 are calculated from points pθplp2p3, v2' and v3 are calculated from points plp2p3p4, and v3' is calculated from points p2p3p4p5. [00154] Figure 19 illustrates a method 1900 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 6b which represents a trajectory path of a motive body. In a first step 1902, four consecutive points of a data path, including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point, are identified. For example, points pθ, pi, p2 and p3 may be identified. In step 1904, a first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point is located. In the illustration of Figure 6b, a first arc 612 defined by points pθ, pi and p3 is identified. In step 1906, a second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point is located. In Figure 6b, a second arc 614 defined by points pθ, p2 and p3 is identified. In a final step 1908, the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc. For example, point pi may be moved along adjustment vector vl into an area between arcs 612 and 614.
[00155] Step 214 (Figure 2) includes smoothing data using a double arc algorithm. Line moves may be converted into two arc moves that are tangent to each other and that maintain a given path tolerance. As illustrated in Figure 9, a line move associated with points P0 and Pi may be replaced with two arc moves associated with points P0 and P1. More particularly, a line move 902 from point P0 to point Pi may be converted into Arci from P0 to arc junction point P' and Arc2 from arc junction point P' to Pi. Arci and Arc2 may be connected to each other and may be tangent to each other at point P'. Arci may be tangent to a preceding move 904 which terminates at point P0. Preceding move 904 may be a line move or an arc move. Further, Arc2 may be tangent to a succeeding or next move 906 which begins at point P1. Succeeding move 906 may be a line move or an arc move, and may be defined after the adjusted position of the next point P2 (not shown in Figure 9) is determined. Smooth transitions between all the program moves are thus enabled. In one embodiment, a radius 908 of Arci is different from a radius 910 of Area- Radii 908 and 910 are shown only partially in Figure 9. Data smoothing essentially smoothes out abrupt turns or discontinuities in the tool path to provide a smoother tool motion. [00156] Figure 20 illustrates a method 2000 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 9. In a first step 2002, a line move extending from a first point of the data path to a second point of the data path is identified. For example, line move 902 extending from point P0 to point Pj may be identified. In a second step 2004, the line move is replaced with a first arc move and a second arc move, the first arc move beginning at the first point and terminating at a junction point, the second arc move beginning at the junction point and terminating at the second point. In the illustration of Figure 9, line move 902 is replaced with arc moves Arci and Arc2, Arci beginning at point P0 and terminating at junction point P', and Arc2 beginning at junction point P1 and terminating at second point P1.
Double Arc Smoothing
[00157] In a third operation, smoothing is performed using a double arc algorithm. The third operation may include converting the lines into arcs, which are mutually tangent to each other, while maintaining a given tolerance. This third operation may include sequentially checking consecutive line target points processed in the second operation in smoothing queue 206 and performing the conversion of lines to arcs. [00158] The double arc algorithm is developed for the third operation. This algorithm causes the final smoothed trajectory to pass through all the target points of the line segments to be smoothed. Thus, the tolerance requirements will be well satisfied. [00159] The double arc algorithm may perform two functions simultaneously in a pipeline manner. First, the algorithm may determine a tangent vector at each target point of a line segment to be smoothed. Second, the algorithm may generate double arcs to replace the line segments to be smoothed. Let P1 , p2, p3, p4, p5, p6, ... , pn be consecutive line target points already processed by the second operation in smoothing queue 206. The first function may perform the following steps:
• If pi, pi-i or pi+ 1 is tagged "smoothing", calculate a desired tangent vector tj (Figure 29) at point pi based on the positions of points Pi-1, pi, and pi+i. The three points p;, PM and p,+[ define the Arcpi-iPipj+i and t; is the tangent vector to the arc at point pj.
• If none of pi, pu, p,+i is tagged "smoothing", do nothing
• Increase i by 1
• Repeat the above steps
[00160] The above function will create a sequence of desired tangent vectors at the target points of the line segments to be smoothed, denoted as ti, t2, t3, t4, t5, t6, .... , tn. The tangent vectors may be referred to as "desired tangent vectors" because the direction changes of these vectors are gradual, which further smoothes the curvature changes in the smoothed trajectory.
The second function may perform the following steps:
• Check points pi, and pi+i to see if the corresponding desired tangent vectors tj, and ti+i have been calculated for p;, and pi+i or not
• If the tangent vectors tj, and U+\ are both available, then create a pair of three- dimensional arcs an and a;2 such that:
• an starts at point p; and is tangent to the tangent vector tj
• aji is tangent to a\2 at a point p between p; and pi+i
• aj2 starts at point p, ends at point p;+i, and is tangent to the tangent vector tj+i
• If any of the tangent vectors tj, and t;+i is not available, do nothing
• Increase i by 1
• Repeat the above steps
[00161] In another embodiment, the second function may perform the following steps:
• If pi, pi+i and pj+2 are marked for smoothing and the corresponding desired tangent vectors tj, tj+i and tj+2 have been calculated for pj, pj+i and pj+2, then create a pair of three-dimensional arcs a;i and aj2 such that:
• an starts at point pi and is tangent to the tangent vector tj
• aii is tangent to a;2 at a point p' between pj and p;+2
• ai2 starts at point p', ends at point pi+2, and is tangent to the tangent vector tj+2.
• Check the shortest distance (d) between pi+i and the closest arc. If the distance is within a given tolerance, the double arcs are valid.
• If the double arcs between pj and pj+2 are invalid, then create a pair of three- dimensional arcs an and a;2 between p; and pi+i such that:
• a;i starts at point pi and is tangent to the tangent vector tj
• an is tangent to a;2 at a point p1 between pj and pi+1
• aj2 starts at point p', ends at point pi+i, and is tangent to the tangent vector tj+j
• Repeat the above steps to generate double arcs between p,+1 and pj+2 • Increase i by 2
• Repeat the above steps
[00162] The operation of the second function in the embodiment described above is illustrated in Figures 30 and 31. In Figure 30, pθ, pi and p2 are marked for smoothing. A pair of three-dimensional arcs al and a2 are created such that arc al starts at point p0 and is tangent to tangent vector tθ; arc al is tangent to arc a2 at a point p' between p0 and p2; and arc a2 starts at point p', ends at point p2, and is tangent to the tangent vector t2. If a distance d between pi and the closer arc al of the two arcs is within a given or predetermined tolerance, then the double arcs al and a2 are valid.
[00163] If, on the other hand, the double arcs al and a2 are invalid, i.e., the distance d is not within the given tolerance, then another pair of three-dimensional arcs a3 and a4 (Figure 31) are created such that arc a3 starts at point p0 and is tangent to tangent vector tθ; arc a3 is tangent to arc a4 at a point p" between p0 and pi ; and arc a4 starts at point p", ends at point pi, and is tangent to the tangent vector tl. The above steps may then be replicated in order to create yet another pair of three-dimensional arcs (not shown) between points pi and p2. Any or all of arcs al, a2, a3 and a4 may be circular arcs, and each of the arcs may have a different, respective radius.
[00164] With the double arc smoothing thus completed between points pθ, pi and p2, the above-described second function may be repeated for the next three points along the trajectory, i.e., points p2, p3 and p4. Further, the second function may be repeated for each subsequent set of three points along the trajectory.
[00165] The above-described double arc smoothing embodiment is directed to the case in which pθ, pi and p2 are each marked for smoothing. Assume now that, of the four points pθ, pi, p2 and p3, pi, p2 and p3 are marked for smoothing. Tangential vectors t0 and tl may be derived from the arc defined by pθ, pi, p2, and tangential vector t2 may be derived from the arc defined by pi, p2, p3. The following five steps may be taken:
1. Double arcs, i.e., arc al from p0 to p1 and arc a2 from p1 to p2, which are tangential at point p1 may be generated from (pθ, p2, tθ, t2), as shown in Figure 30.
2. The shortest distance between pi and the closer of the two double arcs may then be checked. If the distances in the x, y and z directions are less than a predetermined distance, such as 0.0002 inch, then the double arcs al and a2 are valid.
3. If the double arcs al and a2 are invalid, then double arcs a3 and a4 are generated between points p0 and pi and based upon tangent vectors tθ, tl. The two arcs al and a2 may be tangential at point p".
4. There may be a tolerance check for the double arcs. A distance d in Figure 31 is the shortest distance between point p" and a line extending between points pO and pi. If distance d is less than a predetermined distance, such as 0.0005 inch, then the double arcs a3 and a4 are valid. Otherwise, if the double arcs a3 and a4 are invalid, then define the trajectory between points pO, pi as a line extending between points pO and pl.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to generate double arcs between pi and p2 based upon tangent vectors tl and t2.
[00166] The double arc algorithm replaces a line segment with a pair of three-dimensional arcs. Adjacent arcs created by the double arc algorithm may be tangent to each other, and all arcs may have reduced curvature changes. The double arc algorithm may be especially suitable for use in conjunction with TBC, which would yield several advantages. First, for most three-dimensional surfaces and curves, the curvature constantly changes. Mutually tangent shorter arcs provide better and smoother approximation than longer arcs. Second, for five or six axes machining, short three-dimensional XYZ arcs can coordinate with point- to-point moves in ABC axis space. This is a significant advantage since it is difficult to extend the non-TBC long arc three-dimensional smoothing to five or six axes machining. Third, all the three-dimensional arc commands will be directly executed by TBC using true arc technology, which controls motion along the true arc trajectory without polygon approximation. After smoothing, the elements in smoothing queue 206, including positioning commands, line commands, arc commands, and the program end command, may be sent to lookahead queue 208.
[00167] Figure 21 illustrates a method 2100 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figures 5b, 6b, 30 and 31. In a first step 2102, four consecutive points of the path data, including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point, are identified. In the embodiment described above with reference to Figure 6b, four consecutive points pθ, pi, p2 and ρ3 are identified. In a second step 2104, it is determined whether the second point is suitable for smoothing. For example, it may be determined, according to the method described above with reference to Figure 5b, whether point pi is suitable for smoothing. If not, operation may return to step 2102 wherein another set of four consecutive points is identified. For example, four consecutive points pi, p2, p3 and p4 may be identified. If the second point is suitable for smoothing, then a first arc defined by the first point, second point, and fourth point is located (step 2106). In the embodiment of Figure 6b, arc 612 is identified. In a next step 2108, a second arc defined by the first point, third point, and fourth point is located. In the embodiment of Figure 6b, arc 614 is identified. Next, in step 2110, the second point is moved into an area between the first arc and the second arc. For example, as indicated in Figure 6b, point pi may be moved along adjustment vector vl into an area between arcs 612 and 614. Lastly, in step 2112, a line move associated with the second point may be replaced with at least one arc move associated with the second point. For example, a line move leading into point pi, or a line move originating from point pi, may be replaced with an arc move, as illustrated in Figures 30 and 31.
ADDITIVE LOOKAHEAD
[00168] In an additive lookahead operation within lookahead queue 208, it is ensured that there is enough distance to accelerate or decelerate between all velocity changes in the program data. For each programmed move, a stop distance is computed that defines the distance required to decelerate the axes to zero velocity according to S-curve acceleration. It is referred to as S-Curve because the acceleration/deceleration part of the velocity profile (velocity plotted versus time) illustrated in Figure 10 looks like an "S" instead of a straight line. The stop distance may be determined by the lower of: a) the maximum move velocity determined by the angle between the current and next moves; and b) the maximum move velocity for the path curvature determined by the machine model. [00169] The Lookahead operation may ensure enough distance to accelerate or decelerate between all velocity changes. This has advantages in that the machine bumping and dwell marks may be reduced, and the surface finish in machining may be improved.
[00170] Three functions may be planned for the Lookahead operation, namely, third order smoothing, pre-lookahead, and additive lookahead. The additive lookahead function may include searching in lookahead queue 208 for velocity and distance information and determining whether there is enough distance for the machine to accelerate/decelerate properly from one motion command to the next. If there is not enough distance, then the information may be stored and used in the motion kernel to reduce the velocity so that the machine may accelerate/decelerate properly.
[00171] There is a mathematical conversion between the stop distance and the velocity.
The proper velocity may be calculated from the stop distance and the S-Curve, as discussed in more detail below.
[00172] The additive lookahead algorithm may require knowledge of the maximum velocities allowed for different part geometries. A tolerance/arc radius/velocity table may be built for this purpose. The table may provide the maximum allowable velocities for arcs of different radii or curvatures with different tolerance requirements.
[00173] The additive lookahead function may check each newly coming motion command at the head of lookahead queue 208 and calculate the stop distance for the previous command in the following steps:
• Compare the previous command with the command preceding the previous command to get the angle or curvature between these two commands, and use this angle to determine the maximum joint-point velocity which is the allowable maximum velocity at the joint point of these two consecutive motion commands.
• Look up the tolerance/arc radius/velocity table. According to the motion trajectory and the required tolerance, determine the maximum allowable trajectory- velocity for the previous command's motion trajectory.
• Compute the stop distance for the previous command by taking the smaller of the maximum joint-point velocity and the maximum trajectory-velocity, and convert this smaller velocity to the stop distance according to the S-curve velocity profile. • Attach the calculated stop distance to the previous command. [00174] The lookahead is a dynamic process. The continuous trajectory changes may affect the previously processed commands. Each time a new command is added to lookahead queue 208 and a stop distance is calculated for the new command, all the commands in the queue which have already been processed may be reviewed to determine whether the previously calculated stop distances for these commands need to be updated or not. After a new move is processed and placed in a Lookahead queue 208, all previous moves in queue 208 may be reviewed and may have their velocities adjusted downward if required. This final preprocessing operation is analogous to placing speed limits signs along a road before a curve so that the driver can safely navigate through the curve. [00175] The lookahead process includes a first step 216 of determining joint/path feedrate changes, and a second step 218 of looking ahead for the stop distance. In step 216, feedrate changes along the path from point Pj-1 to point P; are determined. In step 218, a segment length Lj may be determined between points Pj- 1 and Pj, as illustrated in Figure 11. Stop distances may also be determined for each of points Pi-I and Pi. The stop distance at point Pi-I should not be greater than the sum of Lj and the stop distance at point Pj. Else, it may not be possible to comply with velocity constraints beyond point Pj. It is this sum to which the term "additive" in "additive lookahead" refers. If it is found that the stop distance at point Pj-I is greater than the sum of Lj and the stop distance at point Pj, then the velocity at point Pj-I may be reduced such that the stop distance at point Pj-) is equal to the sum of Lj and the stop distance at point Pj. In equation form, if (Stop distance ; + ∑L;) < Stop distance M, then set (Stop distance i + ΣLj) = Stop distance \.\.
[00176] In another form, let cmdi, cmd2, cmd3, cmd4, cmds, cmdβ, ... , cmdj be consecutive commands in lookahead queue 208 which have been processed. For command cmdj, 0 < j < i+1, let its path length be lenj, and the stop distance be stopdisj. A "valid stop distance condition" is defined as follows: If the stop distance stopdisj for the command cmdj is equal to or less than the sum of the path length lerij-n and the stop distance stopdisj+i for the command cmdj+i, then the command cmdj meets the "valid stop distance condition". [00177] When a new command cmdj+i is received and processed, it has a path length leni-H, and a stop distance stopdis;+i. Let j = i. The additive lookahead algorithm may perform the following steps:
• Check command cmdj to determine whether it meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., whether stopdisj is equal to or less than the sum of lenj+i and stopdisj+i
• If command cmdj does not meet the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., stopdisj is greater than the sum of lenj+1 and stopdisj+j, then the stop distance for command cmdj will be replaced by the sum of lerij+i and stopdisj+t
• If command cmdj meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., stopdisj is equal to or less than the sum of lenj+i and stopdisj+i, then stop distance stopdisj for command cmdj may remain unchanged, and the update operation is completed
• If j is equal to 0, the update operation is completed
• Set j = j -1, i.e., decrease j by 1
• repeat the above steps
[00178] When the additive lookahead function is, in a backward direction, sequentially reviewing the commands previously processed in lookahead queue 208, checking the "valid stop distance condition", and updating the stop distance of the commands, the updating operation may stop after the first command that meets the "valid stop distance condition" is found. Because the command meets the "valid stop distance condition", the stop distance of the command may remain unchanged. Thus, all the commands previous to the command were met and are still meeting the "valid stop distance condition". That is, nothing changed and nothing needs to change. This is an advantageous property of the additive lookahead algorithm, which provides great efficiency for lookahead operation. Instead of looking back and updating the whole lookahead queue 208, only a few elements in the queue need to be updated, on average.
Stop distance and stopper
[00179] The additive lookahead algorithm introduces the concepts of stop distance and stopper. The stop distance of a motion command with nominal feedrate v/ (Figure 32a) and end point speed vo may be defined as the distance traveled from a target point (Figure 32b) to the point at which a full stop can be achieved according to the S-curve speed profile, as illustrated by the shaded area in Figure 32a. Stopper, which is a virtual target point for a motion command, may be selected such that if the system reduces speed from nominal feedrate vy and comes to a full stop at the stopper according to the S-curve, it passes the actual target point at the desired end point speed vø. The stop distance may be defined as the distance between the target point and the stopper.
[00180] Once the nominal feedrate v/ of a motion command is determined, there exists a one-to-one mapping between the stop distance and the end point speed vø, assuming that the S-curve speed profile is fixed, i.e., the maximum acceleration and jerk are fixed. It may be assumed herein, unless otherwise stated, that the S-curve profile is fixed. Therefore, the stop distance has a direct correspondence to the end point speed; and if the stop distance is given, the end point speed may be accordingly uniquely determined, and vice versa. The additive lookahead algorithm may use the stop distance as a metric of end point speed, which allows the algorithm to be computationally efficient, as discussed below. [00181] The stopper may be used in an S-curve controller to design a motion profile. The S-curve controller may aim at the stopper instead of at an actual target point. The S-curve controller may generate a speed profile in which the controlled tool passes the actual target point at the same point in time at which the tool reaches the desired slowdown speed.
Speed limitations of motion commands
[00182] In the additive lookahead algorithm, each motion command may have four speed limitations: specified feedrate, machine allowable speed, path velocity limit and joint velocity limit. The specified feedrate may be defined as the desired feedrate value given by the upper-level motion planning. The machine allowable speed is a machine limitation on the speed. The maximum allowable speed depends on the hardware of the machine and laws of physics. The path velocity limit is a limit for arc motion. The path velocity limit may depend on the arc radius and tolerance specification. The larger the arc radius and tolerance are, the larger the maximum path velocity limit is. The joint velocity limit may be defined as a speed limit at the joint of two consecutive motion commands. The joint velocity limit may depend on the angle between the two motions and the tolerance specification. The larger the tolerance and the smaller the angle are, the larger the joint speed limit value is.
[00183] In the additive lookahead algorithm, the nominal feedrate is the lowest value among the specified feedrate, the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit. For example, if the specified feedrate is higher than the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit, the lookahead algorithm would force the feedrate to slow down to the smaller value of the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit.
[00184] The slowdown feedrate at the end point of a motion command may depend on the joint velocity limit as well as the nominal feedrate of that motion command and the next motion command. Because the nominal feedrate is the smallest one among the specified feedrate, the machine allowable speed and the path velocity limit, slowdown may occur during a current motion segment and speedup may occur in a next motion segment, such that the feedrate for the current motion segment may be less than the nominal value. The additive lookahead algorithm may use the nominal and slowdown feedrates to calculate the stop distance.
Valid stop distance condition
[00185] The lookahead algorithm may ensure that the distance between the tool and some location ahead of the tool is sufficient to allow the speed of the tool to be changed to a desired level by the time the tool arrives at the location. This condition may be referred to as a "valid stop distance condition" with regard to the additive lookahead algorithm and may be defined mathematically by equation (1):
(1) ds, ≤ lM +ds, +1
where ds and / represent the stop distance and the length of a motion segment, respectively, and subscripts i and i+1 represent the index of motion commands. In the diagram of Figure 33, motion command cmd_i has an end point at p_i, stopper point at stopper_i, and stop distance ds_i. If the stop distance of cmd_i does not exceed the sum of the length and stop distance of cmd_(i+l), or if the stopper_i is in front of the stopper_(i+l), then cmd_i satisfies the valid stop distance condition.
[00186] The valid stop distance condition can also be explained in another way as illustrated by equation (2):
(2) ds, -dsM ≤ l 7t+1
Because the stop distance ds_i and ds_(i+l) correspond to the feedrate at the end point p_i of motion cmd_i and the feedrate at the end point p_(i+l) of motion cmd_(i+l) respectively, equation (2) indicates that the segment length l_(i+l) is long enough to accommodate a speed slowdown from the feedrate at the point p_i to the feedrate at the point p_(i+l).
Additive Lookahead vs. Non-additive Lookahead
[00187] A difference between a TBC additive lookahead algorithm and a non-additive lookahead algorithm is that the additive lookahead algorithm generates an S-curve targeting the stopper and uses only part of the S-curve so that the speed is reduced from vy to vø at the target point. The non-additive lookahead generate an S-curve targeting the actual target point and the speed is reduced from vj to vø at the target point.
[00188] Fig. 34 shows a comparison between the additive and non-additive S-curve speed profile. The speed is reduced from v; to vø at the target point in both profiles. However, in the additive S-curve, the slowdown occurs between time Ubci and time taco, while in the non- additive S-curve, the slowdown occurs between time twmi and time twmo. Thus, the non- additive S-curve requires a longer time and a longer distance than the additive S-curve in order to achieve the same reduction in speed from vj to vø.
[00189] Additive lookahead may be a dynamic process. The continuous trajectory changes may affect the previously-processed commands. Each time a new command is added to the lookahead queue and a stop distance is calculated for the new command, all the commands in the queue which have already been processed may be reviewed to see if the previously-calculated stop distances for these commands need to be updated or not. [00190] When a new command cmd; is received and processed, it has a path length l_i, and a stop distance d_i. The additive lookahead algorithm may perform the following steps:
• Check command cmdj.i to see if it meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., if ds_(i-l) is equal to or less than the sum of l_i and d_i.
• If command cmdi-i does not meet the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., ds_(i-l) is greater than the sum of l_i and d_i, then replace the stop distance ds_(i-l) for command cmdn with the sum of I i and d_i.
• If command cmdj.i meets the "valid stop distance condition", i.e., ds_(i-l) is equal to or less than the sum of l__i and d_i, then the stop distance ds_(i-l) for command cmdj-i may remain unchanged, and the update operation is complete.
• If (i-1) is equal to 0, the update operation is complete.
• i — (decrement the value of i) and repeat the above steps.
[00191] When the additive lookahead function is sequentially reviewing backward the commands previously processed in the lookahead queue, checking the "valid stop distance condition", and updating the stop distance of the commands, the updating operation may stop after the first command that meets the "valid stop distance condition" is found. Because this command meets the "valid stop distance condition", the stop distance of this command may remain unchanged. Further, because this command meets the "valid stop distance condition", all the commands previous to it met, and still meet, the "valid stop distance condition", and none of the previous commands may need to change. [00192] Figures 35a-b provide a comparison of the additive lookahead and the non- additive lookahead algorithms, respectively. In the additive lookahead (Figure 35a), only the third step, i.e., the step of calculating the stop distance ds_i, may require a lot of computation, and may be calculated as shown in equation (3). This calculation may be needed only once for every motion command, and there may be no need to repeat it.
[00193] In the non-additive lookahead algorithm (Figure 35b), both the third and fifth steps, i.e., the steps of calculating slowdown distance and the step of calculating a speed reduction for command i-1, may require a lot of computation, and may be calculated as shown in equations (4) and (5), respectively. The "distance to slowdown", equation (4), is similar to the "calculate stop distance" equation (3).
v "jO÷;l ώ+. v* v d > a™J\ (general case)
GL 2an
(4) stop (2vo +vrf )τ; v d = α max ri (critical point)
(2vo vd < Ci1nJT1 (degenerate case)
[00194] The "reduce speed for command i-1", equation (5) calculates maximum allowable speed change to vø in the given distance, which may involve large computations such as in solving cubic equations.
am&X +2vϋTx (general case) aX +2v,Tx (critical point)
mJTx 2 + 2v0Tx (degenerate case)
[00195] Furthermore, the two steps of the non-additive algorithm represented by equations (4) and (5) may need to be performed recursively until there is enough distance to slow down. Because the non-additive lookahead algorithm needs a longer distance to slow down a same amount of speed, as shown in Figure 34, the loop has to be repeated more times than the additive lookahead algorithm until enough distance is satisfied.
[00196] In general, the additive lookahead may be more computationally efficient than the non-additive lookahead due to the additive lookahead having only one heavy load step compared with two heavy load steps in the non-additive lookahead. Another reason the additive lookahead may be more computationally efficient than the non-additive lookahead is that the additive lookahead' s heavy load step is outside the recursive loop and is only performed once. In contrast, the non-additive lookahead performs the two heavy load steps recursively until enough distance is valid. The additive lookahead also needs less distance to reduce a same amount of speed, , as shown in Figure 34, which means fewer previous motion commands need to be modified. Kinematics Comparison of Additive and Non- Additive Lookahead Algorithms
[00197] Assume that two consecutive motion commands cmd_(i-l) and cmd_i have nominal feedrates v_(i-l) and v_i, respectively. At the joint of the two motions, the feedrate has to slow down to vø. Figure 36 compares the kinematical characteristics of the non- additive lookahead algorithm and the TBC additive lookahead algorithm. [00198] Lookahead operations ensure enough distance to accelerate or decelerate between all speed changes and may be applied to all real time motion control and trajectory planning, such as CNC machine tools, robotics, autonomous vehicles and so on. Because lookahead is usually performed in real time and may modify previously processed motion commands recursively, the efficiency of the algorithm may be of importance to the reduction of the CPU load and the improvement of machine performance.
[00199] Non-additive lookahead algorithms may calculate the distance needed to accelerate/decelerate from one speed to another according to some speed profiles, such as the S-curve speed profile. When the distance of a motion segment is short and is not great enough to accommodate a large speed change, lookahead algorithms may calculate and limit the speed of that motion. The calculation of the speed limit involves a large amount of computation, and repeatedly performing the calculation is not desirable because it takes a lot of processing time and resources. [00200] The additive lookahead algorithm may use a stop distance concept as a metric of speed limitation. Updating the speed limit in the additive lookahead is only one addition compared with the large amount of computation involving solving cubic equations in non- additive lookahead algorithms. Overall, the computational efficiency, less iteration of modifying previous motions, and increased system throughput provide the additive lookahead algorithm of the present invention with several advantages over non-additive lookahead algorithms.
[00201] Figure 22 illustrates a method 2200 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11. In a first step 2202, a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified. In the example of Figure 11, points Pj-2, Pi-1 and Pj along a target tool path are identified. Next, in step 2204, a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined. In Figure 11, segment length Li+1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point P;. Point Pj+i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known. That is, the location of point Pj+1 and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known. However, a minimum allowable distance L;+i between points Pi and Pi+1 is known. Because point Pj+1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point Pj+i. Thus, in order to ensure that it is possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pj+1, the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point Pi is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance Li+1 between points Pi and Pi+1. In a next step 2206, a last maximum allowable speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained. In one embodiment, the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance Lj+1 to the maximum speed at last point Pj at which it may be possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pj+1, i.e., the last maximum allowable speed. In a final step 2208, an other maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established. In the example of Figure 11, established is an other maximum allowable speed at an other point Pi-1 such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed at point Pj which was ascertained in step 2206. In one embodiment, the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the distance Lj to the maximum speed at other point Pi-I at which it may be possible for the tool to come slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon reaching point Pj. [00202] Taking the example above further, the maximum allowable speed at other point Pi- i may be compared to a maximum allowable tolerance speed at other point Pj-), i.e., the maximum speed at other point Pi-1 at which it can be ensured that the actual tool path will remain within tolerance given the curvature of the target tool path at other point Pj-]. The lesser of the maximum allowable speed at other point PM and the maximum allowable tolerance speed at other point Pj- 1 may be identified, and the tool may be moved at this lesser speed at other point Pj-1.
[00203] Taking the above example yet further, a preceding maximum allowable speed of the tool at a point Pj-2 preceding other point Pi-1 such that the tool may possibly slow down to the lesser speed upon arriving at other point PM may be established. A maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at preceding point Pi-2 may be determined dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and/or the curvature of the target tool path at preceding point Pj-2. A lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point may be identified.
[00204] Figure 23 illustrates another method 2300 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11. In a first step 2302, a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified. In the example of Figure 11, points Pj-2, Pi-i and Pi along a target tool path are identified. Next, in step 2304, a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual tool path from the target tool path is established. For example, depending upon the requirements of the work piece, 0.1 cm might be established as the maximum allowable level of deviation of the actual tool path from the target tool path. In step 2306, a curvature of the target tool path is ascertained at a plurality of locations along the target tool path. For example, an angle 1907 (Figure 11) between the line move from point P^ to point Pj- 1 and the line move from point PM to point Pj may be ascertained at point PM. In step 2308, a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at each of the points along the target tool path is determined. The maximum allowable tolerance speed is dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and the curvature. For example, given the angle 2307, a maximum allowable tolerance speed at point Pi-1 may be determined such that the actual tool path does not deviate from the target tool path by more than 0.1 cm. Next, in step 2310, a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined. In Figure 11, segment length Lj+ 1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pj. Point Pi+i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known. That is, the location of point Pi+1 and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known. However, a minimum allowable distance Li+ 1 between points Pi and Pj+i is known. Because point Pi+1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point P;+i. Thus, in order to ensure that it is possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pj+1, the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point Pj is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance L;+i between points P; and Pj+1. In a next step 2312, a last maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at the last point such that the tool may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance is ascertained. In one embodiment, the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance Li+1 to the maximum speed at last point Pi at which it may be possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pi+1, i.e., the last maximum allowable speed. In step 2314, an other maximum allowable stopping speed of the tool at each of the points other than the last point such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point is established. In the example of Figure 11, established is an other maximum allowable stopping speed at an other point Pj-I such that the tool may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed at point Pj which was ascertained in step 2312. In one embodiment, the S-curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the distance L; to the maximum speed at other point Pj- 1 at which it may be possible for the tool to come slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon reaching point Pj. In a final step 2316, a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable stopping speed is identified at each of the points. For example, the lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed determined in step 2308 and the maximum allowable stopping speed established in step 2314 may be identified at each of points Pj-2, PM and Pi.
[00205] Figure 24 illustrates yet another method 2400 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 11. In a first step 2402, a plurality of points along a target tool path are identified. In the example of Figure 11, points Pj-2, Pj-I and Pj along a target tool path are identified. Next, in step 2404, a maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at a last of the points is determined. In Figure 11, segment length Li+ 1 may represent a maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pj. Point Pi+i may not have advanced far enough down the data pipeline for it to be identified, and thus its characteristics may not be known. That is, the location of point P;+i and whether it is a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path may not be known. However, a minimum allowable distance Lj+1 between points P, and Pi+1 is known. Because point Pj+1 may be a corner point or a point at the end of the target tool path, it may be necessary for the tool to come to a stop, or nearly come to a stop, at point P{+\. Thus, in order to ensure that it is possible for the tool to come to a stop upon reaching point Pj+i, the maximum allowable stopping distance of the tool at last point P; is determined to be equal to the minimum allowable distance Lj+1 between points Pi and Pi+1. In a next step 2406, a maximum allowable speed of the tool at an other one of the points such that a required stopping distance of the tool at the other point is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point and the segment length between the other point and the last point. In the embodiment of Figure 11, a maximum allowable speed of the tool at point Pj-1 may be ascertained such that a required stopping distance of the tool at point Pi-I is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at last point Pi and segment length Lj between other point Pj-1 and last point Pj. In one embodiment, the S- curve of Figure 10 may be used to relate the required stopping distance of the tool at point Pi-I to the maximum allowable speed at point Pj-1.
[00206] Taking the above example further, a preceding maximum allowable speed of the tool at a point Pj-2 preceding other point Pj.i such that a required stopping distance of the tool at the preceding point is equal to or less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at last point P; and segment length Lj + Lj-1 between preceding point Pi-I and last point Pi. A maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at preceding point Pj-2 may be determined dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and/or the curvature of the target tool path at preceding point Pj-2. A lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the tool at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point may be identified.
[00207] The Queue Manager Task may be performed by a general queue manager in a queue module that manages all the operations performed on tolerance queue 202, compression queue 204, smoothing queue 206 and lookahead queue 208 in a pipeline manner. The operations may include tolerance understanding on the elements in tolerance queue 202, compression on the elements in compression queue 204, preparatory, corrective, and double-arc smoothing on the elements in smoothing queue 206, third-order smoothing (if necessary), pre-lookahead (if necessary), and lookahead on the elements in lookahead queue 208.
[00208] The queue manager may call the related routines to manage the queue pipeline by performing the following operations: 1) stuff tolerance queue 202 with NC commands received from the NC interpreter; 2) process the NC commands in tolerance queue 202: if it is an E code, then get the tolerance information from this command and store the specified tolerance region and the related tolerance value; else, if it is a non-TBC motion command, calculate the required tolerance for this command according to the available tolerance information, and attach the required tolerance value to this command; 3) take NC commands from tolerance queue 202 and add them to compression queue 204; 4) merge the very short line moves to a longer one, i.e., replace the very short line elements by a longer line element in compression queue 204; 5) take NC commands from compression queue 204 and add them to smoothing queue 206; 6) examine all the line elements in smoothing queue 206 to identify those elements to be smoothed, and make local adjustments for those elements; 7) convert those line elements into arc elements; 8) take NC commands, mostly arc elements, from smoothing queue 206 and add them to lookahead queue 208; 9) check each newly added command and look back to the previously processed commands in lookahead queue 208; 10) determine a proper velocity for the new command, and modify the velocities for all the previous commands if necessary; and 11) take NC commands from lookahead queue 208 and send them to the motion control kernel for execution. [00209] All the above operations on the queues may be performed concurrently. The data process in queues may continue whenever queues are not full. The Queue Manager may call a first routine to perform all the queue operations and move the NC commands through the queue pipeline until all of the queues are full or the NC program is entirely loaded. The first routine may call a second routine to perform the tolerance, compression and smoothing operations, and may call a third routine to perform the lookahead operation. [00210] The motion kernel module may perform the tolerance based motion control and may control the motion associated with program lines and arcs. The motion kernel may replace the non-TBC point-to-point control with the predictive and true arc motion, wherein a line or an arc is the basic trajectory unit. The control may push the axes along the programmed trajectory, correcting for deviations as they are encountered. [00211] A non-TBC CNC controller may interpolate a programmed trajectory into sequential target points with required velocities, and may load them into a PID motion control card for execution. The non-TBC CNC controller may support time-based interpolation, i.e., breaking up the line/arc data into position points and velocity points of fixed (or variable) time intervals. Then, the motion control card may perform PID loops to minimize the following error, i.e., the lag between the instantaneous position and the interpolated target point. Intuitively, imagine an elastic string with one end attached to a motion axis, the other end stepping from target point to target point. The length of the string represents the following error. The motion control card may pull the axis to reduce the length of the string. This motion control is a "pulling" mechanism, wherein line/arc data are interpolated into position points and velocity points of time intervals before execution. Individual axes may move independently under the motion control. Further, the trajectory interpolator may be an open loop, incapable of controlling the following errors. Lastly, the target points may be pre-computed, with little adjustment being made for real-time conditions.
[00212] The predictive TBC motion control may be based on a different mechanism that recognizes line/arc data (no pre-computed interpolation points) and directly pushes the axes along the line/arc trajectory. At every control cycle (which may have a period of 200 μsec, for example), the control may read the position feedback, may compare the current position with the commanded trajectory (a line or an arc), and may determine a point on the trajectory that is the point closest to the actual current position. This point may be defined as the ideal current position. The difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position may be defined as the instantaneous random position error or tolerance error. The instantaneous random position error, also referred to simply as the "position error", may be thought of as the deviation of the actual current position from the line/arc trajectory.
[00213] The TBC tolerance error is different from the non-TBC following error. More particularly, the following error is the difference between the actual current position and the pre-computed target point on one axis. The TBC tolerance error is the vector difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position which may be dynamically calculated in real time. In a non-TBC controller, the pre-computed target points may be interpolated based on a time interval that is usually on the order of a millisecond. In a TBC control system, the ideal current position may be calculated every control cycle. In a non- TBC control system, the motion control card, rather than the host computer, may deal with the following error. In a TBC system, the tolerance error may be directly corrected by TBC. In a non-TBC control system, the following errors of different axes may be handled independently. In a TBC system, the tolerance errors for different axes may be handled coordinately by TBC.
[00214] The TBC predictive motion control, at every control cycle, may perform the following steps:
• Calculate the three-dimensional tangential velocity at the ideal current position of the trajectory according to S-Curve
• Calculate the instantaneous tangential and centripetal acceleration forces and their predictive compensate vectors
• Calculate the instantaneous random position error
• Determine a three-dimensional random corrective velocity • Combine the tangential velocity, the predictive compensate velocity and the random corrective vector together and issue the resultant velocity to push the axes along the trajectory
[00215] The Run System Task may issue servo commands to the machine tool in order to follow the tool path and associated velocities determined in the preceding Queue Manager Task. A command designating a portion of the tool path that the machine tool is to follow may be issued once per millisecond, for example. The portion of the tool path may include a one or more line segments and/or one or more arcs. In an example shown in Figure 12, a command specifies a line segment extending from (1,4,0) to (5,1,6) in x-y-z space. A servo intended to redirect the tool path to compensate for any detected errors, i.e., deviations in the actual tool path from the corrected tool path, may be issued more frequently than a command. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 12, a servo is issued every 200 microseconds, i.e., corresponding with each of the points A-F. Figure 13 illustrates the timing and duration of each servo over the course of a one millisecond command. That is, Figure 13 illustrates the control loop cycle time of the servos. Each servo may have a duration of less than 35 microseconds. In one embodiment, each servo has a duration of approximately between 10 and 15 microseconds. On the rising edge of the servo, the current position or some other parameter of the machine tool may be determined. Over the duration of the servo, calculations using the determined parameter may be performed. On the falling edge of the servo, an output signal to redirect the machine tool relative to the work piece may be issued. A time period of 200 microseconds is used repeatedly herein as an example of a duration of a servo. Of course, however, the cycle time of a servo may be less than or greater than 200 microseconds within the scope of the present invention. [00216] After the first 200 microseconds of the command, the tool may be positioned at point B in Figure 12. An encoder or some other type of position sensing device may sense the actual position of the tool at point B. Upon sensing the tool position at point B, a new target point T to which the tool should be redirected by the servo along a tool subpath 1202 may be calculated or otherwise identified. The calculation of target tool subpath 1202 may be dependent upon a deviation of the actual position of the tool from the target tool path. An example of such a deviation 1204 is shown in Figure 12. The tool may continue to move past the first actual position B during the calculation of tool subpath 1202. The Run System Task of Figure 2 includes a servo 220 having a compute position step 222, an S-Curve step 224, a Predictive Error Compensation step 226, and a Random Error Compensation step 228. The tool may have veered off to point B instead of following the linear tool path from (1, 4, 0) to (5, 1, 6) due to random errors as well as predictive errors that are systematic and repeatable. The predictive errors may be identified via empirical analysis of historic tool position data. Based upon the predictive error, it may be determined that redirecting the tool to point T is most likely to result in the tool actually moving near the desired linear tool path in a smooth motion from point B.
[00217] S-Curve step 224 includes calculating desired acceleration levels along target tool subpath 1202. More particularly, the acceleration needed to complete the servo from point B to point T, i.e., complete target tool subpath 1202, within a desired period of time and at a desired final velocity may be determined. In actuality, the tool may arrive at point C due to random errors and unidentified predictive errors. After additional servos, the tool arrives at points D, E and F. Point F may be reached at the end of the one millisecond command. More particularly, subsequent target tool subpaths may be calculated at the completion of each servo in a manner substantially similar to the calculation of target tool subpath 1202 as described above. The target tool path from (1, 4, 0) to (5, 1, 6) and the target tool subpath 1202 are shown in Figure 12 as being linear. However, it is to be understood that any target tool path or any target tool subpath may be arcuate.
[00218] The second function performed by the Tolerance Controller is the Predictive Error Compensation (step 106 of Figure 1 and step 226 of Figure 2), which may be part of a "motion kernel." The motion kernel replaces a non-TBC point-to-point control technique with predictive and true arc trajectory motion, wherein lines and arcs are the basic trajectory unit. The predictive control pushes the axes along the programmed trajectory and corrects for deviations as they are encountered.
[00219] In one embodiment, at every 200 μsec control cycle, the Tolerance Control may read the position feedback, compare the current position with the commanded trajectory (a line or arc), and find a point on the trajectory that is the closest to the current actual position. This point on the trajectory may be defined and referred to as the current ideal position. The difference between the current actual position and current ideal position as dynamically calculated in real time is defined as the position error, which may be dynamically calculated in real time.
[00220] Next, the predictive control may analyze the motion trajectory and the machine condition to compensate for repeatable motion errors. The correction for these errors may be predicted by using a parameterized mathematical model of the machine that has been configured by measuring actual dynamic machine responses. Predictive motion control may analyze the motion trajectory and the machine condition to make appropriate compensations to certain types of motion errors, which are repeatable and can be measured by experiments. The position error may then be combined with the predictive corrections to compute the new velocity command for each axis. The predictive correction that may be done at each control cycle is illustrated in Figure 14.
[00221] The predictive error compensation may include Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, Tangential Acceleration Compensation, "Stick" Friction Compensation, Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation, Spindle Softness Compensation, and System Delay Compensation, which are each described in turn below.
[00222] The predictive control may precisely machine an arc move without linearizing the arc into many line segments. Under Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, using the laws of physics, the predictive control may instantaneously and in real time calculate the centripetal force needed to pull or hold the axes on the arc at each ideal current position according to the current velocity and the arc trajectory curvature. The centripetal force may be converted to a predictive compensate vector, which may be instantaneously added to the velocity issued to the motion axes.
[00223] A centripetal force vector, based on the current velocity and the arc curvature, is added to a predictive compensation vector that adjusts the velocity command issued to the motion axes. This correction may enable the machine to cut highly accurate arcs. The predictive motion allows the direct precision machining of arc segments without the conversion of arc trajectories into a straight-line approximation.
[00224] Issuing a proportional velocity to multiple axes may not guarantee that a three- dimensional move is linear, i.e., in a straight line. The motion axes involved may not go proportionally as required, because the acceleration/deceleration for different axes depend on their dynamics, which changes from axis to axis. Rather than the required straight-line move, the move may be curved due to differences in axis acceleration/deceleration caused by differing axis dynamics such as belt compliance or servo amplifier gain. Under Tangential Acceleration Compensation, the predictive control may analyze the acceleration for each individual axis and calculate the appropriate compensation forces for the axes. These compensation forces may be converted to the predictive compensation vector to generate the required axis accelerations. This correction causes the axes to be coordinated and to accurately track the programmed trajectory. These compensation forces may be converted to the predictive compensate vector to generate the required axis accelerations. [00225] The stick friction or static friction of a machine tool has considerable influence on the motion control. An axis starting from rest requires an extra kick of energy to overcome the stick friction and begin moving. Under Stick Friction Compensation, to correct and compensate for the stick friction effect, the predictive motion uses a stick friction compensator that may trigger when an axis changes its motion direction, i.e., crosses a zero velocity point. The compensation profile is a notch shape, the height and width of the notch is a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory. The stick friction is different from machine to machine, and from axis to axis. Thus, the compensation is a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory, and is different from machine to machine and from axis to axis. This compensation may eliminate problems such as flat spots on an arc at the axis quadrants. The compensator should be built for each individual axis.
[00226] Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation may correct and compensate for the mechanical inaccuracy and backlash of the machine axis ball screws. The function of getting position feedback is responsible for the leadscrew and backlash compensation. The position values used by the motion kernel are all leadscrew and backlash compensated according to the leadscrew mapping tables. Each time the axes position feedback is read, it may be adjusted by the leadscrew and backlash compensation values stored in leadscrew map tables. This compensation may correct for mechanical axis positioning errors and for "lost motion" during an axis direction change. [00227] For some machines, the mechanical frame of the Z-axis or the spindle may not be rigid enough, causing unwanted vibration during machining. Spindle Softness Compensation may modify the motion parameters for only the Z-axis to reduce this unwanted vibration. The parameters that are modified may include the Z-axis velocity, acceleration and jerk, wherein jerk is defined as the change in acceleration per unit time. As a result of Spindle Softness Compensation, the part surface finish may be improved. [00228] The machine system response to a motion command is typically delayed for mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, there may be a mechanical delay between axis motor motion and actual axis motion because of the mechanical transmission. There also may be an electrical delay between the input of a velocity command to the servo amplifier and actual motion on the motor. The predictive control may compensate for this delay under System Delay Compensation by giving an anticipated adjustment before it is actually needed. This may provide the necessary correction to the motion axes at the time it is needed on the programmed trajectory.
[00229] Via the above-described compensation schemes, the Tolerance Control may compensate for predictive, recurring errors. The predictive control may push the axes along the programmed trajectory and the compensation from the machine model may compensate for and correct repeatable machine errors. Both of these adjustments may greatly reduce the position error between the current position and the line/arc trajectory. [00230] In addition to compensating for predictive error, the Tolerance Control may correct random error, as illustrated in Figure 15. Any remaining position error that is not corrected by the predictive control as illustrated in Figure 14 may be further reduced by the random error correction mechanisms. By utilizing the predictive motion, which directly pushes the axes along the programmed trajectory and the pre-measured/computed compensation, which corrects the repeatable machining errors, the TBC greatly reduces the instantaneous position error (the deviation of the actual current position from the line/arc trajectory). Random error correction is analogous to driving on a road and making small adjustments to the steering wheel in order to compensate for variations in the surface of the road and to thereby stay exactly in the center of the road. [00231] The position deviation resulting from the random error occurred in real-time is further reduced by using random error correction mechanisms, which may include Proportional Control, Integral Control, Derivative Control, S-Curve Acceleration and Velocity Control, and Dynamic Velocity Adjustments. Each of these random error correction mechanisms is described in turn below.
[00232] Under Proportional Control, the position error may be multiplied by a proportional gain parameter to arrive at the random corrective velocity vector. The resulting random corrective velocity vector may be subtracted from the Predictive Correction velocity, i.e., from the commanded velocity, to thereby reduce the error. [00233] Under Integral Control, the position error may be integrated using a modified Laplace transform algorithm. A correction value, which is proportional to the above- integrated result, may be computed and added to the Predictive Correction velocity (commanded velocity). The modified Laplace transform algorithm may eliminate position error that persists over a period of time. A direct integral control may cause undesirable oscillation. A lower frequency modified Laplace transformation may be used to integrate the position errors with much less oscillation.
[00234] Under Derivative Control, a derivative value of the position error may be added to the Predictive Correction velocity to dampen the Random Error correction. This dampening may improve the stability of the Random Error correction. An artificial viscous friction may be added to increase the damping coefficient of the system so that the system is steadier. This is equivalent to a proportional plus derivative control.
[00235] Under S-Curve Acceleration and Velocity Control, changes in velocity that are defined in the part program or are adjusted by the Additive Lookahead algorithm may be controlled using S-curve acceleration. The S-curve acceleration may be computed at each 200 μsec control cycle or servo cycle. Thus, very smooth control of the axes motion and, ultimately, the axes position may be provided. S-Curve acceleration provides a non-linear acceleration method that softens and smoothes the transition between the at- velocity phase and the acceleration/deceleration phase. [00236] The S-Curve velocity profile typically has seven phases, including increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed (constant velocity); increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration.
[00237] Non-TBC CNC control uses a time-based scheduling mechanism. Thus, the S-
Curve may be implemented as a function of time. The function output is the scheduled position and velocity. The TBC uses the true arc technology. At each control cycle, the ideal position on the trajectory may be calculated instead of the scheduled position. Thus, only the velocity along the trajectory needs to be calculated from the S-Curve. The S-Curve in the TBC system may be implemented as a real-time process.
[00238] The velocity may be calculated from the instantaneous path distance at every control cycle. This mechanism may eliminate the velocity error accumulation and may support some real-time requests such as feed override, pause, resume and single step.
[00239] The S-Curve in TBC may have the typical seven phases of increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed (constant velocity); increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration. The increasing acceleration phase may include a constant initial jerk JO. Acceleration may be linearly increased to the maximum acceleration with the initial jerk JO. Velocity may increase as a quadratic function of time.
[00240] In the constant acceleration phase, there may be no jerk, i.e., jerk may equal 0.
Acceleration may remain at the maximum acceleration. Velocity may increase as a linear function of time.
[00241] In the decreasing acceleration phase, jerk may equal -J, wherein J is the maximum jerk. Acceleration may linearly decrease from the maximum acceleration to 0 with the negative maximum jerk -J. Velocity may increase as a quadratic function of time.
[00242] In the at speed phase, jerk and acceleration both equal 0. Velocity is equal to the final constant velocity.
[00243] In the increasing deceleration phase, jerk may equal -J, wherein J is the maximum jerk. Deceleration may linearly increase from 0 to the maximum deceleration with the maximum jerk J. Velocity may decrease from the final velocity as a quadratic function of time. [00244] In the constant deceleration phase, there may be no jerk, i.e., jerk may equal 0. Deceleration may remain at the maximum deceleration. Velocity may decrease as a linear function of time.
[00245] In the decreasing deceleration phase, jerk may equal the maximum jerk J. Deceleration may decrease linearly from the maximum deceleration to 0 with jerk being equal to the maximum jerk J. Velocity may decrease as a quadratic function of time. [00246] During the lookahead processing, the additive lookahead algorithm discussed above may attach a stop distance to each motion command. The stop distance may be used in the S-Curve implementation to guarantee that there is enough distance in which to accelerate/decelerate properly between velocities.
[00247] In one embodiment, S-Curve computation involves the use of several variables, such as distance_to_go to represent the trajectory length from the current position to the target position of a command. Variable stop_distance_left represents the sum of distance_to_go and the value of the stop_distance attached to the command. The values of distance_to_go and stop_distance_left may vary with the instantaneous position of the machine. Variable stop_distance_required represents the moving distance required to completely stop the machine according to the velocity, deceleration and the S-Curve for the command. The value of stop_distance_required may vary with the velocity. [00248] When a motion command is being executed, at every control cycle, the variables stop_distance_left and stop_distance_required for this command may be calculated and compared. Whenever the value of stop_distance_left is less than or equal to the value of stop_distance_required (not enough distance is left), a velocity/distance conversion algorithm may be used to calculate the velocity from the stop_distance_left, as described in more detail below. When the value of stop_distance_left is greater than the value of stop_distance_required (enough distance is left), the velocity in each of the seven phases may be calculated as described below.
[00249] In Phase 1, acceleration is increased linearly according to the initial jerk. Acceleration may be calculated according to the equation: acceleratioiii+1 = acceleration! + JO x cycle_time wherein JO is the initial jerk and cycle_time is the time interval of each control cycle, which may be approximately 200 μsec. Velocity is increased according to the acceleration value. Velocity may be calculated according to the equation: velocityi+i = velocity; + acceleration x cycle_time. When acceleration reaches the maximum_acceleration, it may be truncated as follows:
If (acceleration >= maximum_acceleration), then set: acceleration = maximum_acceleration; and enter Phase 2.
[00250] In Phase 2, acceleration equals maximum_acceleration. Velocity may be calculated according to the equation: velocityi+i = velocity; + maximum_acceleration x cycle_time.
The difference between the fmal_velocity and current velocity is expressed by the equation: fmal_velocity - velocity = 0.5 x J x t2, wherein J is the maximum jerk, and t is the time required to reach the final velocity. Since the acceleration equals the product of jerk and time, i.e., J x t, the equation above may be rearranged as:
2 x J x (final_velocity - velocity) = acceleration2 or acceleration = -^2J (final __ velocity - velocity) .
If acceleration is less than the maximum_acceleration, then Phase 3 (decreasing acceleration) may be entered.
[00251] In Phase 3, velocity may be calculated by the equations: acceleration = ^J 2 J (final _ velocity - velocity) velocityi+j = velocity! + acceleration x cycle_time.
If velocity reaches final_velocity, then Phase 4 (steady state speed) may be entered. [00252] In Phase 4, velocity equals the maximum_velocity, and acceleration equals 0. [00253] In each of Phase 5 (increasing deceleration), Phase 6 (constant deceleration), and Phase 7 (decreasing deceleration), the velocity may be calculated using a velocity/distance conversion algorithm. [00254] At the control cycle when the value of stop_distance_left is less than or equal to the value of stop_distance_required (the condition automatically satisfies in Phases 5, 6 and
7), the velocity/distance conversion algorithm may be used to calculate the velocity from the stop_distance_left. The key features of one embodiment of this algorithm are described below.
[00255] Since S-Curve is a function that defines the relation between velocity and time, it can be represented by the velocity equation: velocity = S_Curve (t).
Let U be the current time, and let t2 be the time when the motion completely stops. The time required for the motion to completely stop is then given by t2 - tj. The algorithm may cause the value of stop_distance_required to be equal to the value of stop_distance_left by selecting a proper velocity.
The moving distance of the machine during t2 - U may be defined as the stop_distance_required at time t\. The stop_distance_required at time ti may be calculated by taking the integral of the velocity equation with respect to the time t as per the equation: stop_distance_required = J t2 ti S_Curve(t) dt.
The above equation defines the relation between stop_distance and time. For simplicity, the equation may be rewritten as: stop_distance_required = Stop_Dis(t). Therefore, t = StOp-DiS"1 (stop_distance_required) wherein StOp-DiS'1 is the inverse function of Stop_Dis. Substituting for t in the velocity equation yields: velocity = S-CUrVe(StOp-DiS"1 (stop_distance_required)). In order to make the value of stop_distance_required equal to the value of stop_distance_left, the velocity may be set according to the equation: velocity = S-CUrVe(StOp-DiS'1 (stop_distance_left)).
[00256] In a machine tool, different axes may have different maximum velocities. The maximum velocity of the Z axis is usually lower than the maximum velocity of the X axis or of the Y axis. Assume maxv_x, maxv_y and maxv_z are the maximum velocities for axes X, Y and Z, respectively, and dmv is a vector in three-dimensional space. If the machine tool moves along the direction of dmv, then the maximum allowable vector velocity along the direction of dmv is a function of the vector dmv: maximurn_allowable_yelocity = f (dmv).
The function is a mapping from a three-dimensional unit vector to a real number. A conservative way to determine function f is to define it as a constant: f(dmv) = Min{ maxv_x, maxv_y, maxv_z }
[00257] If the machine tool starts from the origin, along the direction of an arbitrary direction vector dmv, and with a given vector velocity f(dmv), and moves for one unit of time, then the machine tool will arrive at a certain end point. The end points resulting from all possible moving directions will form a three-dimensional surface, which is referred to as the velocity envelope. The shape of the velocity envelope depends on the function f. In this case, the distance from an end point to the origin is a constant Min{ maxv_x, maxv_y, maxv_z }, and thus the velocity envelope is a sphere.
[00258] An aggressive strategy is to move the machine tool along direction dmv with the highest possible vector velocity, provided the velocities of axes X, Y, and Z are bounded by maxv^x, maxv_y and maxv_z, respectively. In this case, the velocity envelope is a three- dimensional cubic box, with length 2 x maxv_x, width 2 x maxv_y, and height 2 x maxv_z. [00259] The velocity envelope can be used to define the velocity coordinate type of axes. There are four velocity coordination types, in order of decreasing aggressiveness: AXIS_VELOCITY_CUBIC_TYPE, AXIS_VELOCITY_CYLINDER_TYPE, AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE_TYPE, and AXIS_VELOCITY_SPHERE_TYPE. The TBC may use AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE JTYPE. The velocity envelope of AXIS_VELOCITY_ELLIPSE_TYPE is a three-dimensional ellipse, with X axis length equal to 2 x maxvjc, Y axis length equal to 2 x maxv_y and Z axis length equal to 2 x maxv__z.
[00260] The TBC supports the dynamic velocity adjustment. Under Dynamic Velocity Adjustments, the Tolerance Control may monitor the position error and compare the error with the specified tolerance. A safety level, defined as a percentage of the required tolerance, may be used to control the position error. If the position error is beyond the safety level, the axes velocity may automatically be decreased in order to reduce the position error. If the position error is below the safety level, the axes velocity may automatically be increased to the original velocity. In this way, the machine may be allowed to run as fast as possible, or nearly so, while still maintaining the desired tolerance. The dynamic velocity adjustment may be based on a Laplace transformation.
[00261] The TBC motion kernel of the present invention may take the motion commands from the lookahead queue and control the servo system to track the contour trajectory. The TBC motion control is different from non-TBC motion control in that it is a closed-loop contour tracking control. A comparison between non-TBC motion control and TBC motion control is provided below.
Non-TBC Motion Control Structure
[00262] In order to track a three-dimensional contour trajectory, non-TBC motion control system may decompose the three-dimensional contour into X/Y/Z axes and interpolate the X/Y/Z motion with respect to time. Each axis may have its own time based reference trajectory and may use feedback and feedforward control to track its own motion trajectory independently. Ideally, if each axis tracks its reference trajectory perfectly, the resulting three-dimensional contour would also be perfectly followed. Due to the existence of disturbances, shown in Figure 37, and modeling errors, perfect tracking is normally not achievable and there may be tracking errors between the actual axis motions and reference trajectories. There may be an attempt to minimize the tracking error in each axis without any teamwork or coordination among the three axes. The trajectory of each axis may be tracked without knowing or caring what the state of the trajectory in other axes is. For example, even if the trajectory in one axis meets a large resisting force and lags behind its reference trajectory, there may be an attempt to track the preset trajectories of the other two axes. The result is that even though the trajectory may be tracked perfectly though two of the three axes, the actual contour that is achieved may still deviate from the reference contour significantly.
[00263] The non-TBC motion control system illustrated in Figure 37 may be time deterministic. That is, the x/y/z axis motion trajectories may be time based and the entire system's runtime may be accurately determined beforehand. F_x, F_y and F_z may indicate feedforward controllers for each of the three axes; and C__x, C_y and C_z may indicate feedback controllers for each of the three axes. The contour tracking may be open loop in non-TBC motion control. Motion along each of the three axes may be independent without knowledge of, or dependence upon, motion along any other axis. In other words, there may be no teamwork among the axes. There may be no arc motion even with circular interpolation in non-TBC motion control. Different dynamic responses in the axes may negatively affect tracking accuracy and surface quality.
[00264] In non-TBC motion control the contour tracking may be open loop, and there may be no guarantee that the actual contour achieved is close enough to the desired reference contour. An example of uncoordinated motion is given in Figures 38a-d, where a reference trajectory y=x (Figure 38a) is decomposed into time based axis trajectories: y=kt (Figure 38b) and x=kt (Figure 38c). The non-TBC motion controller may control motion in the x and y axes to track their trajectories independently. Two different cases are represented in Figures 38b-d. Case 1 is characterized by small tracking errors in both x and y axes; however the contouring error as shown in Figure 38d is relatively large. Case 2 is characterized by larger tracking errors in both x and y axes, but there is no contouring error at all shown in Figure 38d. Because the non-TBC motion control reduces the tracking error in each axis individually without any coordination among axes, the non-TBC motion system may consider case 1 to be more desirable than case 2.
[00265] When a contour is decomposed into x/y/z axes and becomes three time-based axis trajectories, important kinematics information, e.g., centripetal acceleration information, may be lost. Without the centripetal acceleration information, a factor that distinguishes arc motion from line motions, true arc motion may not be possible. Moreover, because the effects of centripetal force may not be compensated for, the actual tool position may be biased in a radially-outward direction due to the centripetal force. [00266] In non-TBC motion control, the dynamic response of each axis may affect the contouring performance. If the dynamics are not matched with each other, e.g., some axis responds faster than others or some axis responds slower than others, the actual contour may distort or deviate from the desired contour. TBC Motion Control Structure
[00267] TBC motion control does not involve decomposing a three-dimensional contour into three independent time-based axis trajectories. Rather, TBC motion control may compare the actual contour position with a reference contour and determine a control signal to minimize the contour error. One embodiment of TBC motion control structure is shown in Fig. 39, where all signals are vectors and represented by thick lines. In contrast, in the non-TBC motion control structure shown in Fig. 37, signals are scalars and are represented by thin lines.
[00268] The TBC motion control structure of Figure 39 may employ contour-based feedback plus feedforward control. The contour tracking may be closed-loop, and true arc motion may be possible. That is, the tool may be commanded to follow an arcuate trajectory rather than a trajectory formed by a series of linear segments that approximate a curved trajectory. TBC motion control may not be time deterministic, and may be capable of on- the-fly feedrate adjustments.
[00269] At every control cycle, such as every 200 microseconds, the controller may read the actual contour position feedback, compare the actual position with the reference contour, and find out the closest point on the reference contour to the actual position. This point is defined as the ideal current position (ICP). The controller may include three functional blocks: feedforward, feedback and stick friction/backlash compensation as illustrated in Figure 40 and described below.
[00270] At every control cycle, the controller may calculate the desired motion based on the ICP (including acceleration and velocity in both normal and tangential directions), and may include a feedforward controller to convert the desired motion into a velocity control signal. A runtime feedrate adjuster may also be added to adjust the feedrate (velocity) for tolerance control purposes.
[00271] The controller may also calculate the tracking errors in both normal and tangential directions at every cycle. The error in the normal direction is the distance from the actual contour position to the ICP, i.e., the tolerance error or contour error. The error in the tangential direction is defined as the amount of path length that the ICP lags behind. Because the normal error may be important to the system performance, the TBC controller may include two different feedback controllers for the normal and tangential errors and may convert the tracking errors into a velocity control signal. The stick friction and backlash compensation may further improve the accuracy of the machine tool. [00272] As compared with the non-TBC motion control, an advantage of the TBC motion control is the closed-loop structure. The closed-loop contour tracking control may coordinate the three axes and minimize the contour error. For example, if the x-axis has a large resisting force and lags behind its reference trajectory, the other two axes could slow down to match the x-axis motion so that the actual contour follows the reference contour. The TBC motion kernel may also enable true arc motion because the centripetal acceleration may be considered in the control.
[00273] Because the desired motion at each control cycle is based on the contour, the ICP, and the current system condition, such as the tolerance error, the system may no longer be time deterministic. However, on-the-fly feedrate adjustment may be possible. When the contour/tolerance error is below the specified value, the system feedrate may be increased. Conversely, when the contour/tolerance error exceeds the specified value, the feedrate may be reduced such that the error is also reduced. In other words, the system may maximize the feedrate while maintaining the contour/tolerance error within a specified range for optimal system runtime or throughput.
[00274] The motion kernel may receive motion commands from lookahead queue 208. The motion commands may go through tolerance understanding processing, data compressing, data smoothing, and lookahead processing before being executed by the motion kernel. Each command may carry the required tolerance value for TBC control and the stop distance for S-Curve computation. The motion kernel may be executed every 200 μsec in RTSS environment wherein a deterministic response is ensured. [00275] Figure 16 illustrates one embodiment of a method 1600 of the present invention for executing a motion kernel. In a first step 1602, an element is taken from lookahead queue 208. The element may be the motion command to be executed next. Next, in step 1604, a routine may be used to initialize and calculate some variables and parameters which are needed for executing the command just taken in step 1602. In step 1606, a routine that is the main part of the motion kernel is executed. The routine of step 1606 may perform the predictive motion, true arc move, tolerance control and S-Curve computation. In step 1608, a routine may determine whether the execution of the current motion command has been completed. If so, operation is returned to step 1602 to take another motion command from lookahead queue 208. If not, operation is returned to step 1606 to continue performance of the predictive motion, true arc move, tolerance control and S-Curve computation. [00276] Step 1606 may include twenty substeps as described below, and referred to in Figures 39 and 40, in order to convert a motion command into a servo amplifier digital-to- analog converter (DAC) command, or a servo amplifier command for use with pulse width modulation and digital controls and drives. These twenty substeps may be performed within servo 220. In Step 1, the current tool position is obtained, and the position may be leadscrew and backlash compensated.
[00277] Position geometry analysis is performed in Step 2. More particularly, four computations may be made: the ideal current position on the arc or line trajectory; the current tangential moving direction; the positional deviation from the ideal position; and the tolerance error.
[00278] Step 3 includes performing lag distance delay compensation. The lag distance required to compensate time delay in the system may be computed, and this lag distance may be added to the stop distance which is used to calculate the velocity by the S-Curve. [00279] S-Curve velocity control is performed in Step 4. The tool velocity may be calculated as a function of stop distance according to the S Curve. The output is relative speed, having a value between 0 and 1.
[00280] Modified Laplace transformation and tangential predictive control is performed in Step 5. The current velocity may be estimated by the modified Laplace transformation. Tangential predictive control may be added.
[00281] Step 6 includes velocity control for axes. Velocity components may be computed for each axis. The computation may be based on the velocity calculated at step 4 and the tangential moving direction computed at step 2.
[00282] Acceleration is estimated in Step 7. The centripetal force as well as the compensation vector for the centripetal compensation may be estimated. The order, i.e., sequence, of Steps 5 through 7 is arbitrary and may be changed in the program code. [00283] Step 8 includes centripetal predictive compensation in which the centripetal compensation vector may be added to velocity. Step 9 includes statistical analysis, and may be used for research.
[00284] In Step 10, the current moving direction is computed. The current moving direction may be needed for looking up the leadscrew mapping tables to implement the leadscrew/backlash position compensation. Step 11 includes viscous friction estimation in which the error velocity is estimated.
[00285] Step 12 includes random error correction and viscous friction correction. The random error correction vector may be calculated, and the viscous friction may be added thereto.
[00286] A run time velocity adjustment is performed in Step 13. It is determined whether the position error is within the safety tolerance level. If so, the velocity slow down function may be disabled. If not, the velocity slow down function may be enabled, which may decrease the velocity accordingly.
[00287] Step 14 includes a variable gain calculation in which the constant gain, the first order gain, the second order gain, and the combined gain may be calculated. In Step 15, machine vibrations may be analyzed, compensated for, and/or eliminated.
[00288] Random error correction may be performed in Step 16. The random error correction vector may be multiplied by the combined gain. The random error correction vector may be truncated and/or applied to velocity.
[00289] In Step 17, the velocity error may be reduced by using a modified Laplace transformation. Step 18 includes motor saturation protection. The DAC voltage change may be detected at every cycle. The DAC voltage value may be truncated if it is too high.
[00290] Velocity coordination may be performed in Step 19. Machine movement for axes may be coordinated with non-uniform maximum velocities.
[00291] In Step 20, a velocity command, ranging from -10 to +10 volts, may be transmitted in order to control velocity.
[00292] The table below illustrates which of the twenty steps are performed in converting three types of motion commands into a servo amplifier DAC command. A "Rapid Line" motion command initiates a straight line move that may be executed at the maximum feedrate for each axis in the move. A Rapid Line command always stops at the end of a move, while a Line command may not. A Rapid Line command may be used to move the tool to a given point as fast as possible.
[00293] The TBC motion kernel may be deployed on a wide variety of CNC machine platform types. Like other CNC controllers, parameters may be adjusted to optimize the control's performance for a particular machining platform or environment. Adjustment of these parameters is referred to as "tuning".
[00294] The present invention encompasses five categories of tuning parameters, including S-Curve control parameters, smoothing/compression control parameters, motor speed adjustment parameters, dynamic control gains, and a speed/radius tolerance relation lookup table. The S-Curve control parameters are adjustable within a reasonable range in order to achieve maximum allowable speed, maximum allowable acceleration, maximum allowable deceleration, maximum allowable start jerk, and/or maximum allowable end jerk. Smoothing/Compression control parameters are also adjustable within a reasonable range in order to achieve first order smoothing length limit (segments longer than value are not smoothed), first order smoothing angle limit (angles larger than value are not smoothed), second order smoothing length limit, and/or data compression Off/On control. Motor speed adjustment parameters may be manually adjustable to achieve M - multiplier (i.e., at X percent of maximum voltage, X percent of maximum speed is observed), and/or B - constant drifting adjuster for each axis (electronic zero compensation). Dynamic control gains may be preset for a machine class, and may be manually modifiable as needed. Dynamic control gains may include time/response gain parameters. Excessively high values of the time/response gain parameters may cause oscillations, and low values may cause slow/soft motion response. Lastly, the speed/radius tolerance relation lookup table may be preset for each class of machines, and may be manually adjusted as necessary. The above-described tuning parameters may be listed together with other system configuration parameters in a configuration file which may be read and interpreted during the system configuration time.
TBC Geometry Analysis Motion Command Pre-Analysis
[00295] Before executing any motion command, the TBC motion kernel may load the command and analyze the geometry. The stopper plane normal (SPN) direction and stopper position may be calculated in the pre-analysis and may be used through the entire executing period until this motion command is finished. For a line motion, the SPN may be calculated as indicated by equation (6) and shown in Figure 41, which illustrates the line motion geometry pre-analysis:
(6) SPN1 = Pi~l ~ Pi
[00296] For an arc motion, the SPN may be calculated as indicated by equation (7) and shown in Figure 42, which illustrates arc motion geometry pre-analysis, where APN stands for the unit direction vector of the arc plane normal direction, and C stands for the center of the arc.
[00297] The stopper position Psi may be calculated as indicated by equation (8) for both line and arc motions.
(8) Ps1 = P1 -Us1 -SPN1
Real-time Geometry Analysis
[00298] At each control cycle, the TBC motion kernel may read the actual contour (tool) position feedback PtI and compare the actual position with the reference contour to find the ideal current position (ICP), contour/tolerance error (en) and the distance_to_go d (to the stopper).
[00299] For a line motion, the geometry is shown in Figure 43, which illustrates line motion geometry analysis, and may be calculated as indicated by equations (9) and (10).
(9) d =< Ptl-Psi, SPN > (10) en - (PtI - Psi) - d SPN
wherein <a,b> is the inner production of vector a and vector b. Thus, if a = [xa, ya, za], and b = [xb, yb, zb], then <a,b> = xa*xb + ya*yb + za*zb. PtI is the tool position, Psi is the stopper position of the i motion segment, and SPN is the unit direction vector of stopper plane normal (SPN) direction. Equation (9) may be interpreted as the distance d being equal to the length of Ptl-Psi in the SPN direction.
[00300J For an arc motion, because the actual contour or tool position may not be on the arc plane, the tool position may be first projected onto the arc plane, as may be calculated as indicated in equation (11) and as shown in Figures 44a-b, which are illustrative of arc motion geometry analysis.
(11) P 'tl = (PtI - Ci)- < PtI - Ci, APN > -APN
Equation (11) may be interpreted as P'tl being equal to the unit arc plane normal direction vector APN being multiplied by a difference between vector (PtI-Ci) and the vector <Ptl-Ci, APN>.
[00301] The vector P'tl is the projection of (PtI-Ci) on the arc plane. Once the vector P'tl is found on the arc plane, then ICP, the unit tangential and radial direction vectors dt and dr, and contour/tolerance error en (also referred to as the normal error) may be determined as indicated in equations ( 12), ( 13), ( 14) and ( 15).
(12) dr =
\P'tl
(13) ICP = Ci + R - dr
(14) dt = drx APN
(15) en = PtI-ICP
[00302] In order to calculate the distance_to_go, i.e., the path length from ICP to the stopper, the arc length between ICP and target point Pi may first be calculated. Any arc that is more than 180 degrees may be cut into two arcs. The distance_to_go may be calculated by use of the following three equations (16), (17) and (18). The meanings of the variables of equations (16), (17) and (18) may be discerned with reference to Figures 44a-b.
(17) β = sin"1[~]
(18) d = 2aR + dsi
TBC S-Curve Controller
[00303] S-Curve acceleration provides a non-linear acceleration method that softens and smoothes the transition between the at-the-speed phase and the acceleration/deceleration phase. It is referred to as "S-Curve" because the acceleration/deceleration part of the velocity profile is S-shaped instead of linear.
[00304] The S Curve velocity profile usually has seven phases: increasing acceleration; constant acceleration; decreasing acceleration; at speed; increasing deceleration; constant deceleration; and decreasing deceleration.
[00305] Non-TBC motion control systems may use the S-Curve to generate reference trajectories, i.e., scheduled position, velocity, acceleration and so on. The S-Curve is time- based and implemented outside the control loop (real-time portion). The TBC S-Curve controller may be different from the Non-TBC S-Curve controller. At each control cycle, based on the distance to go, the TBC S-Curve controller may calculate the desired velocity and acceleration along the reference contour trajectory. The TBC S-Curve controller may be distance-based and implemented as a real time process. The velocity may be calculated from the instantaneous path distance at every control cycle. This mechanism may reduce the velocity error accumulation, and may also support some real time requests such as on-the-fly feedrate adjustment, feed override, pause, resume and single step. [00306] A flow chart of one embodiment of a method of operation 4500 of a TBC S-Curve controller is shown in Figure 45. In a first step 4502, the flag is checked to see if the current system status is "accelerate" or "decelerate." If the status is decelerate, operation proceeds to step 4512. On the other hand, if the current status is "accelerate", the stop_distance_required is calculated in step 4504. The stop_distance_required may be defined as the minimum distance that the tool would travel according to the S-curve before the system could bring the tool to a stop. The stop distance may be a function of current speed and acceleration. In step 4506, if the given distance_to_go "d" is greater than the stop_distance_required "dO", which means that it is safe to continue to move forward, then operation proceeds to step 4512 to calculate the desired acceleration and velocity. Otherwise, if the distance_to_go "d" is less than the stop_distance_required "dO", which means the system must brake immediately, then brake information is calculated and the flag is set to decelerate in step 4508. Because the distance_to_go "d" is not great enough for the system to brake according to the original S-Curve (with preset maximum jerk and acceleration), maximum jerk may be modified in step 4510 so that the system does not overshoot. Two distances, dl and d3, which may be used to detect the S-Curve phase, may also be updated in step 4510. Step 4512 may be considered the core of the S-Curve controller. According to the current system status and the critical distances calculated beforehand, the S-Curve phase, desired velocity and acceleration may be determined in step 4512. Because the S-Curve controller runs in real time, care may be taken to ensure that the controller does not run out of data. When the total moving distance of the motion commands at the queue becomes too short, the system may need to slowdown to prevent data starvation. In step 4516, on-the-fly feedrate adjustment and user override is applied. In step 4518, an advanced nonlinear jerk-acceleration- velocity (JAV) filter is applied to remove the noise in the velocity signal.
TBC Feed Forward Control
Feed Forward Signals and Gains
[00307] Feed forward may be based on the ideal current position (ICP). The calculation of the three feed forward parts, i.e., normal acceleration FFan, tangential velocity FFvt, and tangential acceleration FFat, is shown in Figure 46, which illustrates velocity and acceleration feedforward. In Figure 46, "d" represents the distance_to_go obtained from the geometry analysis; and dt and dr represent unit tangential and radial/normal direction vectors, respectively. [00308] In a lag distance compensation block 4602, the lag distance required to compensate time delay in the system may be computed and added to the distance_to_go to arrive at a compensated distance. S-Curve controller 4604 may receive the compensated distance and calculate the desired velocity v and acceleration a (both v and a are scalars) along the trajectory.
[00309] The acceleration a on line 4606 may be multiplied by the unit tangential direction vector dt 4608 to produce the tangential acceleration vector at 4610. The feed forward gain, Kaff, may convert the tangential acceleration at into a control signal FF at, which is acceptable by the servo system.
[00310] The Modified Laplace block 4612 may estimate the current velocity, compare the current velocity with last velocity command, and add a predictive compensation into the S- curve velocity command v to reduce the tangential tracking error. The compensated velocity command multiplies the unit tangential direction vector dt 4608 and becomes the tangential velocity vector vt 4614. Because the servo system takes the velocity control commands, no further conversion may be needed for the velocity vector. A feed forward gain 1 at 4616 results in a signal FFvt and may enable all channels to be at the same level. [00311] The centripetal acceleration an 4618 may be calculated by the circular motion physics, i.e., an = v A . The centripetal acceleration may be directed toward the arc center and opposite of the radial/normal direction. The same feed forward gain Kaff as applied to the tangential acceleration may be applied to convert the normal acceleration into a suitable control signal FFan.
Runtime Feedrate Adjuster (μ)
[00312] The runtime or "on-the-fly" feedrate adjuster is a unique feature of TBC motion control, and is not available in other control systems. The non-TBC, time-based control strategy's reference contour trajectory is predetermined outside the control loop, and no modification can be done inside the control loop. In contrast, the TBC motion kernel may not have any predetermined reference trajectories, and desired motion may be determined inside the control loop at every control cycle based on the current system condition. Thus, the runtime feedrate adjuster may be possible. [00313] The difference between the actual current position and the ideal current position may be defined as the instantaneous random position error or tolerance error. The instantaneous random position error, also referred to simply as the "position error", may be thought of as the deviation of the actual current position from the desired line/arc trajectory. The runtime feedrate adjuster may compare the position/tolerance error to the specified error tolerance. If the position error is bigger than, or too close to, the specified error tolerance, the runtime feedrate adjuster may slow down the feedrate to improve tracking accuracy. On the other hand, if the error is smaller than, and not too close to, the specified tolerance, the runtime feedrate adjuster may increase the feedrate to improve the system throughput. Generally, the speed of the tool may be increased if the position error is below the specified error tolerance, and the speed of the tool may be decreased if the position error is above the specified error tolerance. It is possible, in one embodiment, to not increase the feedrate even if the contour error is very small, but to retain the ability to either increase or reduce the feedrate as appropriate.
[00314] The runtime feedrate adjuster may be a constrained optimization mechanism. That is, under the constraint of the contour/tolerance error within a specified range, the runtime feedrate adjuster may maximize the feedrate to achieve optimal system throughput.
TBC Feedback Control
Normal Error Feedback Control with Variable Gain (τ)
[00315] The normal error en, or contour/tolerance error, may be defined as the shortest distance from the current tool position to the reference contour, and TBC motion control may reduce this error. Because this is a three-dimensional error, the coordinated motion of the three axes together may be needed to correct it. The error may also be five or six- dimensional when additional axes, in the form of rotational axes, are included in the trajectories and in the calculations. Thus, where three dimensions or three axes are referred to in the discussion below, it is to be understood that the discussion is equally applicable to multi-dimensional systems including more than three dimensions and more than three axes. [00316] A fundamental difference between the TBC and the non-TBC control is that the non-TBC control typically decomposes the three-dimensional reference contour trajectory into three independent axis motions, and controls the three axes without any knowledge of the contour/tolerance error. The TBC motion control, in contrast, may directly address the three-dimensional contour/tolerance error. The actual position of the tool may be sensed along each of three axes. A three-dimensional position error between the actual position of the tool in each of the three axes and a desired position of the tool in each of the three axes may then be calculated. A three-dimensional position error signal dependent upon the calculated the three-dimensional position error may be produced. The speed and/or direction of the tool may be controlled dependent upon the three-dimensional position error signal. As described herein, and illustrated herein with various examples, three-dimensional position errors may be calculated by use of vector mathematics.
[00317] As is clear from the above description, TBC control may enable motion along one axis to affect motion control along the other two axes in real time, i.e., there may be intercoupling between the motion control of the different axes. Non-TBC motion control may not include compensating for inter-axes effects, such as centripetal force, as TBC motion control may. Because of the lack of compensation for centripetal force, a tool controlled by a non-TBC method may systematically travel radially outward of a desired arcuate trajectory.
[00318] As shown in Fig. 47, which illustrates the variable-gain feedback control of normal error, the TBC motion control may use a variable-gain feedback control to address the normal error. The error may be calculated in the real time geometry analysis 4002 (Figure 40). A special feedback controller Cn may provide system stability and reduce the normal error.
[00319] The variable gain τ 4702 may be a function of both tangential velocity and normal acceleration. Loosely speaking, the faster the system moves, the larger the gain that is needed to correct the normal error. The larger the gain, the more quickly the normal error may be corrected.
Tangential Error Feedback Control
[00320] At each control cycle, the TBC may generate a tangential velocity command. The integration of the tangential velocity commands may produce a position on the reference contour, which may be considered a current target point on the reference contour. The tangential error may be defined as the path length from the ideal current position (ICP) to the current target point. A feedback controller Ct 4004 (Figure 40) may reduce the tangential error.
Different Dynamic Responses of the Two Feedback Controls
[00321] The TBC feedback control may include two parts: tangential error feedback control and normal error feedback control. Instead of treating the two errors the same or equally, two feedback controllers may be provided for the errors, with each feedback controller addressing a respective one of the two errors. A first reason for the different treatment of the two errors is that the normal error may be more important than the tangential error in terms of tracking accuracy and surface finish quality, and thus more weight may be placed on the normal error. A second reason for the different treatment of the two errors is that the servo system may have limited power, and it may be desirable to use the power to do more important things first. Thus, two different feedback controllers may be used for treating normal and tangential errors. The normal error loop may have higher bandwidth or faster dynamic response. Loosely speaking, more servo power may be used to correct normal error than tangential error, and the normal error may be reduced faster than the tangential error.
TBC Stick Friction and Backlash Compensation
[00322] The stick friction may have a considerable influence on the motion control. To correct the stick friction effect, the TBC motion kernel may use a stick friction compensator. This compensator may be triggered when an axis changes its motion direction, i.e., across a zero velocity point. The compensation profile may have a notch shape, with the height and width of the notch being a function of the velocity and the local curvature of the trajectory. [00323] Leadscrews may be used in machine tools as a mechanical transmission to convert rotary motion into linear motion. The inaccuracy of the ball screw and backlash may need to be compensated. The position values used by the motion kernel may be all leadscrew and backlash compensated according to the leadscrew mapping tables. [00324] The compensation block may determine the current moving direction, which may be needed for looking up the leadscrew mapping table to implement leadscrew/backlash position compensation. The compensation block may also compensate for the stick friction.
TBC Control Signal Protection
[00325] The TBC motion control signal may be the sum of the feed forward control signal, the feedback control signal and the stick friction compensation signal. Before sending the control signal to the servo system through digital-to-analog converters (DACs), protection procedure may be performed to avoid overloading the machine. The protection procedure may include two steps, including a first step of limiting the control signal changing rate. The servo system may receive the velocity command, and the control signal change rate may correspond to acceleration/deceleration. Although the S-Curve controller may take the acceleration/deceleration into account, it is still possible that the overall control signal may change too fast due to other reasons, such as tracking error feedback, disturbances, stick friction compensation, and so on. In order to avoid exceeding the servo system capacity and for smooth motion, the control signal change rate may be limited. That is, if the difference between the current and previous control commands exceeds a threshold, the current command may be limited so that the difference is saturated at the threshold. [00326] A second step of the protection procedure may be to limit the control signal. Both the DAC and the servo system may be capable of receiving only limited control signal input up to a maximum amount. If the current control command exceeds this threshold, then steps may be taken to saturate the current control command to the maximum control input. [00327] Figure 17 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a machine 1700 of the present invention for machining a work piece 1702. Machine 1700 includes a controller in the form of a controller card 1704, an actuator in the form of servo drives 1706x, 1706y, 1706z, 1706s, a cutting tool 1708, and position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz and 1710s, which may be in the form of encoders.
[00328] The machine tool retains and carries cutting tool 1708 while the cutting tool rotates and engages the work piece, as indicated by the dashed line between the work piece and the cutting tool in Figure 17. The machine tool provides a mounting approach and linear/rotational drive approach for the cutting tool. Cutting tool 1708 is the material remover in machine 1700, and may be mounted in the rotating spindle mechanism (not shown) which may be attached to the z-axis of the machine tool. The geometric orientation of the cutting tool with respect to the work piece may be fixed due to its mounting position on the z-axis.
[00329] As is typical of most motion control cards, controller card 1704 includes connectors 1712, 1714, 1716 and 1717 for physically connecting controller card 1704 to servo drives 1706 and position sensors 1710 in order to facilitate communications. Servo drives 1706 may move work piece 1702 in the x, y and z axes and rotate cutting tool 1708 about the z-axis. Four connectors 1712, 1714, 1716, 1717 are depicted on controller card 1704, one for each controlled axis of motion and one for the rotation of cutting tool 1708, but other configurations are also possible. The communication signals exchanged between controller card 1704 and servo drives 1706 must often be converted into the appropriate format. For example, some actuator motors use an analog voltage input signal between -10 volts and +10 volts to determine at what rate the motors should turn. [00330] Most digital computers, like the Intel Pentium Based PC, do not support analog voltages, but utilize groups of bits (ones and zeros) represented by discrete voltage levels (+5 volts and 0 volts) to represent values. Thus, if a PC based motion control card were to command a motor to spin in the clockwise direction at its maximum speed (+10 volts in our example) the collection of bits representing this request would have to be converted to the +10 volt signal understood by the motor. This conversion of signals for communication purposes is standard in the industry and often performed by the input/output, I/O, module of the controller card. In Figure 17, one I/O module (1718, 1720 and 1722) is depicted for each controlled axis.
[00331] Some control cards incorporate a CPU 1724 and on-board memory 1726 for the execution of programs and control algorithms. The PMAC offered by Delta Tau and the DMC- 1700 by Galil Motion Control, Inc. of Mountain View, Calif, is typical of cards incorporating a CPU and memory. The servo transducer 5 -axis PCB Assembly (part no. 415-0622-001), offered by Hurco Companies, Inc. of Indianapolis, Ind., may be used as the control card in the exemplary embodiment. This Hurco servo transducer does not have an onboard CPU and memory but utilizes the CPU and memory of the computer into which they are plugged for these services. The difference between these two configurations is primarily one of cost and is of little consequence to a programmer implementing the tolerance based control technology of this invention. The integration of these components and the method by which control algorithms are stored and executed by the CPU is well understood in the art. The details of this process have been omitted for the sake of brevity. To simplify the explanation of the invention, Figure 17 shows CPU 1724 and memory 1726 physically integrated on motion control card 1704.
[00332] In the exemplary embodiment, a multi-tasking operating system (OS), like Windows XP offered by the Microsoft Corporation of Redmond Washington, may be employed for running the algorithms implementing this invention. A real-time OS, like RTX offered by Ready Systems of Sunnyvale, Calif, could also be used improving the run time performance of the algorithms as well. The decision of what operating system to use and whether or not to employ multi-tasking paradigm depends on the application at hand and is a decision routinely made by those skilled in the art of computer system programming and design. Contained in memory 1726 is a data area for storage of values relevant to the task at hand (1728, motion command and permitted feedrates; 1730, NC tolerance commands; 1732, feedrate limitation mappings; 1734, other data), as is commonly employed by people skilled in the art of programming.
[00333] Position sensors 171 Ox, 171 Oy, 171 Oz sense the positions of work piece 1702 in the x, y and z directions, respectively, as indicated by the dashed lines between the position sensors and the work piece in Figure 17. More particularly, in one embodiment, position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz sense the positions of three respective ballscrew mechanisms (not shown) that drive movable positioning slides (not shown) of the machine tool. The work piece is attached to one of the positioning slides, which, by the nature of the cascaded mounting approach of all of the positioning slides, permits the work piece to be moved in two directions, i.e., the x and y directions. Thus, the position of the work piece in the x-y plane may be deduced from knowledge of where the work piece is attached to the x and y positioning slides and knowledge of the positions of the ballscrew mechanisms. There is generally a fixed geometric relationship between the work piece, the ballscrew mechanisms and the positioning slides. Given that the rotating spindle mechanism is attached to the z- axis positioning slide, position sensor 171Oz may sense the position of the z-axis (third direction) ballscrew mechanism, which enables the linear position of the cutting tool along the z-axis to be deduced. Position sensor 1710s senses the rotational position of cutting tool 1708, as indicated by the dashed line between position sensor 1710s and the cutting tool in Figure 17. Position sensors 171Ox, 171Oy, 171Oz, 1710s may transmit associated position signals to CPU 1724 via connectors 1712, 1714, 1716, 1717. Thus, position sensors 1710 may provide the Position Feedback depicted in Figure 1.
[00334] Figure 25 illustrates a method 2500 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12. In a first step 2502, a target tool path is identified. In the example shown in Figure 12, a target tool path from (1,4,0) to (5,1,6) is identified. In step 2504, the tool is commanded to follow the target tool path from an initial position. For example, the tool may be commanded to follow the target tool path from initial position (1,4,0) to (5,1,6). Next, in step 2506, an actual position of the tool is sensed after the commanding step. In the example of Figure 12, an actual position of the tool at point B is sensed. In a final step 2508, a target tool subpath from the actual position is calculated to correct for predictive errors in movement of the tool. For example, a target tool subpath 1202 from the actual position at point B is calculated to correct for predictive errors in movement of the tool. The predictive errors that are corrected may occur anywhere along the path between points A and F, for example. Further, the predictive errors may be empirically determined long before the target tool path is identified. [00335] Figure 26 illustrates another method 2600 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12. In a first step 2602, predictive errors in movement of the tool are empirically determined. In the example shown in Figure 12, predictive errors in the movement of the tool may have been empirically determined through testing before the machine tool has arrived at (1,4,0) or before the machine tool has even gotten within proximity of the work piece. The empirical determination may occur in a laboratory, in a manufacturing plant, or in a combination of both types of environments, for example. The determination of the predictive errors may be dependent upon ambient temperature and/or humidity, for example. In step 2604, actual movements of the tool are monitored. For example, position sensors 1710 may sense the positions of machine tool 1708 and transmit associated position signals to CPU 1724 as described above. In a final step 2606, the actual movement of the tool are controlled dependent upon the empirically determined predictive errors and random errors in the actual movements of the tool. For example, the tool may be directed along target tool subpaths, such as subpath 1202, by servo amplifier 1706. [00336] Figure 27 illustrates yet another method 2700 of the present invention as described above with reference to Figure 12. In a first step 2702, an actual position of the tool after a first of a plurality of sequential movements is sensed. For example, position sensors 1710 may sense the position of machine tool 1708 after a movement of tool 1708. Next, in step 2704, a target position of the tool is calculated based on the sensing step. The target position is calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of the tool. For example, CPU 1724 may calculate target position T based upon position sensors 1710 sensing the position of machine tool 1708 at point B. Target position T may be calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of tool 1708. Target position T may be calculated to maximize the probability of point C, i.e., the actual position after the servo, being on the target tool path between points (1,4,0) and (5,1,6) after the effects of the predictive errors during the servo. In a final step 2706, the sensing and calculating steps are repeated for other movements of the tool. For example, the position of the tool at each of points C, D, E and F may be sensed and a new target position may be calculated after and based upon each of these sensing steps. [00337] One embodiment of a method of trajectory motion control of the present invention is shown in pages 1-16 of the TBC Flowcharts and pages 1-5 of the TBC Kernel Flowcharts of the attached Appendix I.
[00338] While this invention has been described as having an exemplary design, the present invention may be further modified within the spirit and scope of this disclosure. This application is therefore intended to cover any variations, uses, or adaptations of the invention using its general principles.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method of adjusting path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2102) four consecutive points of the path data including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point; determining (2104) whether the second point is suitable for smoothing; if the second point is suitable for smoothing, then: locating (2106) a first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point; locating (2108) a second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point; moving (2110) the second point into an area between the first arc and the second arc; and replacing (2112) a line move associated with the second point with at least one arc move associated with the second point.
2. The method of claim 1 wherein the at least one arc move is tangent to both a preceding move and a succeeding move.
3. The method of claim 1 wherein the at least one arc move comprises two arc moves, the two arc moves being tangent to one another.
4. The method of claim 1 comprising the further step of moving the third point into the area between the first arc and the second arc.
5. The method of claim 1 wherein the line move and the at least one arc move are also associated with the third point.
6. The method of claim 1 comprising the further steps of: identifying a fifth consecutive point succeeding the fourth point; determining whether the third point is suitable for smoothing; if the third point is suitable for smoothing, then: locating a third arc defined by the second point, the third point and the fifth point; locating a fourth arc defined by the second point, the fourth point and the fifth point; moving the third point into an area between the third arc and the fourth arc; and replacing a line move associated with the third point with at least one arc move associated with the third point.
7. A method of adjusting path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (1802) three consecutive points of the path data; ascertaining (1804) at least one of: a first distance between a circular arc defined by the three points and a middle portion of a first line extending between a first of the points and a second of the points; and a second distance between the circular arc and a middle portion of a second line extending between the second point and a third of the points; determining a turn angle between the first line and the second line; and performing smoothing on the second point if: at least one of the first distance and the second distance is less than a threshold distance; and the turn angle is greater than a threshold angle.
8. The method of claim 7 wherein smoothing is performed on the second point if a first move from the first point to the second point comprises a first line move and a second move from the second point to the third point comprises a second line move.
9. The method of claim 8 wherein the step of performing smoothing includes replacing at least one of the first line move and the second line move with at least one arc move.
10. The method of claim 7 wherein the threshold line distance is approximately between 0.0002 inch and 0.001 inch.
11. The method of claim 7 wherein the threshold angle is approximately between 130 degrees and 160 degrees.
12. The method of claim 7 wherein the first distance is between the circular arc and a midpoint of the first line, and the second distance is between the circular arc and a midpoint of the second line.
13. The method of claim 12 wherein smoothing is performed on the second point if each of the first distance and the second distance is less than the threshold distance.
14. A method of adjusting path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (1902) four consecutive points of the path data including a first point, a second point, a third point and a fourth point; locating (1904) a first arc defined by the first point, the second point and the fourth point; locating (1906) a second arc defined by the first point, the third point and the fourth point; and moving (1908) the second point into an area between the first arc and the second arc.
15. The method of claim 14 wherein the second point is moved in a direction toward a closest point on the second arc.
16. The method of claim 14 comprising the further step of moving the third point into the area between the first arc and the second arc.
17. The method of claim 16 comprising the further step of determining whether the first point, the second point and the third point are suitable for smoothing.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein: if each of the first point, the second point and the third point is suitable for smoothing, moving the second point less than 45% of a distance between the second point and the second arc; if the second point is suitable for smoothing, one of the first point and the third point is suitable for smoothing, and an other of the first point and the third point is not suitable for smoothing, moving the second point approximately between 45% and 55% of a distance between the second point and the second arc; and if the second point is suitable for smoothing, and neither of the first point and the third point is suitable for smoothing, leaving the second point unmoved.
19. The method of claim 18 comprising the further steps of: identifying a fifth consecutive point succeeding the fourth point; locating a third arc defined by the second point, the third point and the fifth point; locating a fourth arc defined by the second point, the fourth point and the fifth point; and moving the third point and the fourth point into an area between the third arc and the fourth arc.
20. The method of claim 16 wherein the second point is moved in a direction toward a closest point on the second arc, and the third point is moved in a direction toward a closest point on the third arc.
21. A method of adjusting path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2002) a line move extending from a first point of the path data to a second point of the path data; and replacing (2004) the line move with a first arc move and a second arc move, the first arc move beginning at the first point and terminating at a junction point, the second arc move beginning at the junction point and terminating at the second point.
22. The method of claim 21 wherein the first arc move is tangent to a preceding move at the first point.
23. The method of claim 21 wherein the first arc move is tangent to the second arc move at the junction point.
24. The method of claim 21 wherein the second arc move is tangent to a succeeding move at the second point.
25. The method of claim 21 wherein the first arc move has a first radius and the second arc move has a second radius different from the first radius.
26. A method of processing path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2202) a plurality of points along a target path; determining (2204) a maximum allowable stopping distance of the motive body at a last of the points; ascertaining (2206) a last maximum allowable speed of the motive body at the last point such that the motive body may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance; and establishing (2208) an other maximum allowable speed of the motive body at an other one of the points such that the motive body may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point.
27. The method of claim 26 comprising the further steps of: establishing a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual path from the target path; determining a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the other point, the maximum allowable tolerance speed being dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation; and identifying a lesser speed equal to a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the other maximum allowable speed at the other point.
28. The method of claim 27 comprising the further step of establishing a preceding maximum allowable speed of the motive body at a point preceding the other point such that the motive body may possibly slow down to the lesser speed upon arriving at the other point.
29. The method of claim 28 comprising the further steps of: determining a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the preceding point dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation; and identifying a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point.
30. The method of claim 25 wherein the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point corresponds to a segment length between the last point and a subsequent point, the subsequent point being adjacent to and downstream of the last point.
31. The method of claim 30 wherein the subsequent point may comprise one of an end of the target path and a corner point.
32. The method of claim 26 wherein the step of ascertaining a last maximum allowable speed comprises using an S-curve to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance to the last maximum allowable speed.
33. A method of processing path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2302) a plurality of points along a target path; establishing (2304) a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual path from the target path; ascertaining (2306) a curvature of the target path at a plurality of locations along the target path; determining (2308) a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at each of the points along the target path, the maximum allowable tolerance speed being dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation and the curvature; determining (2310) a maximum allowable stopping distance of the motive body at a last of the points; ascertaining (2312) a last maximum allowable stopping speed of the motive body at the last point such that the motive body may come to a stop within the maximum allowable stopping distance; establishing (2314) an other maximum allowable stopping speed of the motive body at each of the points other than the last point such that the may possibly slow down to the last maximum allowable speed upon arriving at the last point; and identifying (2316) a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable stopping speed at each of the points.
34. The method of claim 33 wherein the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point corresponds to a segment length between the last point and a subsequent point, the subsequent point being adjacent to and downstream of the last point.
35. The method of claim 34 wherein the subsequent point may comprise one of an end of the target path and a corner point.
36. The method of claim 33 wherein the step of ascertaining a last maximum allowable stopping speed comprises using an S -curve to relate the maximum allowable stopping distance to the last maximum allowable stopping speed.
37. The method of claim 33 wherein the step of establishing an other maximum allowable stopping speed comprises using an S-curve to relate segment lengths between the other points and the last point to the other maximum allowable stopping speed.
38. The method of claim 33 wherein the step of establishing an other maximum allowable stopping speed comprises ensuring that a respective stop distance at each of the other points is one of less than and equal to a sum of a respective segment length between the other point and the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last of the points.
39. The method of claim 33 comprising the further step of moving the motive body at the lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable stopping speed at each of the points.
40. A method of processing path data for a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2402) a plurality of points along a target path, each selected two of the points being separated by a respective segment length; determining (2404) a maximum allowable stopping distance of the motive body at a last of the points; and ascertaining (2406) a maximum allowable speed of the motive body at an other one of the points such that a required stopping distance of the motive body at the other point is one of equal to and less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point and the segment length between the other point and the last point.
41. The method of claim 40 comprising the further steps of: establishing a maximum allowable level of deviation of an actual path from the target path; determining a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the other point, the maximum allowable tolerance speed being dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation; and identifying a lesser speed equal to a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed and the maximum allowable speed at the other point.
42. The method of claim 41 comprising the further step of establishing a preceding maximum allowable speed of the motive body at a point preceding the other point such that a required stopping distance of the motive body at the preceding point is one of equal to and less than a sum of the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point and the segment length between the preceding point and the last point.
43. The method of claim 42 comprising the further steps of: determining a maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the preceding point dependent upon the maximum allowable level of deviation; and identifying a lesser of the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the preceding point and the preceding maximum allowable speed at the preceding point.
44. The method of claim 41 comprising the further step of ascertaining a curvature of the target path at a plurality of locations along the target path, wherein the maximum allowable tolerance speed of the motive body at the other point is dependent upon the curvature.
45. The method of claim 40 wherein the maximum allowable stopping distance at the last point corresponds to a segment length between the last point and a subsequent point, the subsequent point being adjacent to and downstream of the last point.
46. The method of claim 45 wherein the subsequent point may comprise one of an end of the target path and a corner point.
47. The method of claim 40 wherein the step of ascertaining a maximum allowable speed at the other point comprises using an S -curve to relate the required stopping distance at the other point to the maximum allowable speed at the other point.
48. A method of operating a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: identifying (2502) a target path; commanding (2504) the motive body to follow the target path from an initial position; sensing (2506) a first actual position of the motive body after the commanding step; and calculating (2508) a first target subpath from the first actual position to correct for predictive errors in movement of the motive body.
49. The method of claim 48 comprising the further step of empirically determining the predictive errors in movement of the motive body, the empirically determining step occurring before the identifying step.
50. The method of claim 48 wherein the target subpath is calculated to compensate for random error in movement of the motive body from the initial position to the actual position.
51. The method of claim 48 wherein the calculating step is dependent upon a deviation of the first actual position of the motive body from the target path.
52. The method of claim 48 comprising the further steps of: directing the motive body to follow the first target subpath; sensing a second actual position of the motive body after the directing step; and calculating a second target subpath to correct for errors in movement of the motive body.
53. The method of claim 48 comprising the further step of determining acceleration needed to complete the first target subpath within a desired period of time and at a desired final velocity.
54. The method of claim 48 comprising the further step of calculating desired acceleration levels along the first target subpath.
55. The method of claim 48 wherein the calculating step includes at least one of Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, Tangential Acceleration Compensation, Stick Friction Compensation, Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation, Spindle Softness Compensation, and System Delay Compensation.
56. The method of claim 48 wherein the motive body continues to move past the first actual position during the calculating step.
57. A method of operating a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: empirically (2602) determining predictive errors in movement of the motive body; monitoring (2604) actual movements of the motive body; and controlling (2606) the actual movements of the motive body dependent upon: the empirically determined predictive errors; and random errors in the actual movements of the motive body.
58. The method of claim 57 comprising the further step of commanding the tool to follow a target path from an initial position, the monitoring step including sensing a first actual position of the motive body after the commanding step, the controlling step including calculating a first target subpath from the first actual position to correct for the predictive errors and the random errors in the movement of the motive body.
59. The method of claim 58 wherein the calculating of the first target subpath is dependent upon a deviation of the first actual position of the motive body from the target path.
60. The method of claim 58 comprising the further steps of: directing the motive body to follow the first target subpath; sensing a second actual position of the motive body after the directing step; and calculating a second target subpath to correct for errors in movement of the motive body.
61. The method of claim 58 comprising the further step of determining acceleration needed to complete the first target subpath within a desired period of time and at a desired final velocity.
62. The method of claim 57 wherein the empirically determining step precedes the monitoring step and the controlling step.
63. The method of claim 57 wherein the controlling step includes compensating for the predictive errors and the random errors.
64. The method of claim 57 comprising the further step of calculating desired acceleration levels of the motive body.
65. The method of claim 57 wherein the controlling step includes at least one of Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, Tangential Acceleration Compensation, Stick Friction Compensation, Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation, Spindle Softness Compensation, and System Delay Compensation.
66. A method of operating a motive body having a plurality of sequential movements, said method comprising the steps of: sensing (2702) an actual position of the motive body after a first of the movements of the motive body; calculating (2704) a target position of the motive body based on the sensing step, the target position being calculated to compensate for predictive errors and random errors in the movements of the motive body; and repeating (2706) the sensing and calculating steps for other ones of the movements of the motive body.
67. The method of claim 66 wherein the predictive errors are empirically determined.
68. The method of claim 66 wherein the predictive errors are empirically determined before the sensing and calculating steps.
69. The method of claim 66 wherein the target position is calculated to compensate for predictive errors in both the first movement and the other movements of the motive body.
70. The method of claim 66 comprising the further step of determining acceleration needed to reach the target position within a desired period of time and at a desired final velocity.
71. The method of claim 66 wherein the calculating step includes at least one of Centripetal Force Compensation for Arc Motion, Tangential Acceleration Compensation, Stick Friction Compensation, Leadscrew and Backlash Compensation, Spindle Softness Compensation, and System Delay Compensation.
72. The method of claim 66 wherein the motive body continues to move past the actual position during the calculating step.
73. A method of operating a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: sensing (2702) an actual position of the motive body; calculating (2704) a position error between the actual position of the motive body and a desired position of the motive body; comparing (2602, 2604) the position error to a specified error tolerance; and adjusting (2606) a speed of the motive body dependent upon the comparing step.
74. The method of claim 73 wherein the adjusting step includes increasing the speed of the motive body if the position error is below the specified error tolerance, and decreasing the speed of the motive body if the position error is above the specified error tolerance.
75. A method of operating a motive body, said method comprising the steps of: sensing (2702) an actual position of the motive body along each of a plurality of axes; calculating (2704) a multi-dimensional position error between the actual position of the motive body in each of the axes and a multi-dimensional reference trajectory; producing (2602, 2604) a multi-dimensional position error signal dependent upon the calculating step; and controlling (2606) at least one of a speed and a direction of the motive body dependent upon the multi-dimensional position error signal.
76. The method of claim 75 wherein the multi-dimensional position error is calculated as a vector.
77. The method of claim 75 wherein said controlling step includes using a tangential error feedback controller and a normal error feedback controller.
78. The method of claim 77 wherein said controlling step includes assigning more weight to an output of said normal error feedback controller than to an output of said tangential error feedback controller.
79. The method of claim 75 wherein the axes include an x-axis, a y-axis and a z-axis of a machine tool.
EP06748600.1A 2005-03-23 2006-03-23 Method of tolerance-based trajectory planning Active EP1869531B1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US66439805P 2005-03-23 2005-03-23
PCT/US2006/010607 WO2006102517A2 (en) 2005-03-23 2006-03-23 Method of tolerance-based trajectory planning and control

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP1869531A1 true EP1869531A1 (en) 2007-12-26
EP1869531B1 EP1869531B1 (en) 2020-04-22

Family

ID=36754241

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP06748600.1A Active EP1869531B1 (en) 2005-03-23 2006-03-23 Method of tolerance-based trajectory planning

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (3) US7450127B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1869531B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2010511919A (en)
CN (1) CN101180591A (en)
CA (3) CA2747118C (en)
SG (2) SG173407A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2006102517A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (172)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006099347A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fanuc Ltd Robot movement control method
CA2747118C (en) * 2005-03-23 2015-02-10 Hurco Companies, Inc. Method of curvature controlled data smoothing
US20070055431A1 (en) * 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Weiwen Deng Method and apparatus for preview-based vehicle lateral control
DE102005050205A1 (en) * 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Mtu Aero Engines Gmbh Method and device for compensating position and shape deviations
DE102005050209A1 (en) * 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Ott, Reinhold, Waterloo Video signal feeding device for e.g. television set, has control unit for controlling video signal source depending on presence signal that is delivered by presence detect unit, which detects presence of person at area of feeding device
DE102005061570A1 (en) * 2005-12-22 2007-07-05 Siemens Ag Method for determining position-led approximate path to be traveled e.g. by processing machines and machine tools, involves using scalar path parameter in start function
US8073564B2 (en) * 2006-07-05 2011-12-06 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Multi-robot control interface
US8271132B2 (en) * 2008-03-13 2012-09-18 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc System and method for seamless task-directed autonomy for robots
US7801644B2 (en) 2006-07-05 2010-09-21 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Generic robot architecture
US8355818B2 (en) 2009-09-03 2013-01-15 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Robots, systems, and methods for hazard evaluation and visualization
US7620477B2 (en) 2006-07-05 2009-11-17 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Robotic intelligence kernel
US8965578B2 (en) 2006-07-05 2015-02-24 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Real time explosive hazard information sensing, processing, and communication for autonomous operation
US7587260B2 (en) 2006-07-05 2009-09-08 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Autonomous navigation system and method
US7668621B2 (en) * 2006-07-05 2010-02-23 The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy Robotic guarded motion system and method
US7584020B2 (en) * 2006-07-05 2009-09-01 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Occupancy change detection system and method
US7974738B2 (en) * 2006-07-05 2011-07-05 Battelle Energy Alliance, Llc Robotics virtual rail system and method
US8150545B2 (en) * 2006-07-28 2012-04-03 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Position-dependent compliance compensation in a machine tool
JP4800873B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2011-10-26 オークマ株式会社 Approximate curve generation program and method from approximate point cloud data
DE102006037952A1 (en) * 2006-08-12 2008-02-14 Mtu Aero Engines Gmbh Method for monitoring a manufacturing process
US9320569B2 (en) * 2006-11-14 2016-04-26 General Electric Company Systems and methods for implant distance measurement
US7546170B2 (en) * 2007-01-02 2009-06-09 Neuroblast, Inc. Easily tuned and robust control algorithm for single or multiple variable systems
US7479751B2 (en) * 2007-01-29 2009-01-20 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. Elimination of unintended velocity reversals in s-curve velocity profiles
US8606498B2 (en) * 2007-02-16 2013-12-10 Javad Gnss, Inc. Path approximation for planar motion of a ground vehicle
US8032235B2 (en) * 2007-06-28 2011-10-04 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. Model predictive control system and method for reduction of steady state error
US7774121B2 (en) * 2007-07-31 2010-08-10 Gm Global Technology Operations, Inc. Curve speed control system with adaptive map preview time and driving mode selection
US20090088916A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-02 Honeywell International Inc. Method and system for automatic path planning and obstacle/collision avoidance of autonomous vehicles
US7979174B2 (en) * 2007-09-28 2011-07-12 Honeywell International Inc. Automatic planning and regulation of the speed of autonomous vehicles
US7919940B2 (en) * 2007-10-21 2011-04-05 Ge Intelligent Platforms, Inc. System and method for jerk limited trajectory planning for a path planner
DE102007053216A1 (en) 2007-11-06 2009-05-07 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method and device for controlling a movement sequence of a machine element
DE102007061323A1 (en) * 2007-12-19 2009-07-02 Kuka Roboter Gmbh Method for controlling the movement of a robot within a workspace
DE102007062996A1 (en) * 2007-12-21 2009-06-25 Robert Bosch Gmbh Machine tool device
DE102008005926A1 (en) 2008-01-24 2009-07-30 Kuka Roboter Gmbh Method and device for monitoring a manipulator
US8078399B2 (en) * 2008-03-10 2011-12-13 Honeywell International Inc. Method and device for three-dimensional path planning to avoid obstacles using multiple planes
EP2144127B1 (en) * 2008-07-08 2014-04-30 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method and control device for synchronising a collector of a handling device
US9141105B2 (en) 2008-07-23 2015-09-22 Hurco Companies, Inc. Method and apparatus for monitoring or controlling a machine tool system
US8175725B2 (en) * 2008-09-08 2012-05-08 National Instruments Corporation Adapting move constraints for position based moves in a trajectory generator
US8121749B1 (en) 2008-09-25 2012-02-21 Honeywell International Inc. System for integrating dynamically observed and static information for route planning in a graph based planner
TWI375140B (en) * 2008-10-13 2012-10-21 Ind Tech Res Inst Accumulative method for estimating a processing velocity limitation and method for controlling acceleration and deceleration before interpolation
JP5127934B2 (en) * 2008-12-09 2013-01-23 三菱電機株式会社 Machine motion trajectory measuring device, numerically controlled machine tool, and machine motion trajectory measuring method
TWI361961B (en) * 2008-12-17 2012-04-11 Ind Tech Res Inst Motion control servo loop apparatus
CN101887250B (en) * 2009-05-12 2012-05-30 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 CNC (Computerized Numerical Control) machine tool control device
DE102009023307A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-02 Kuka Roboter Gmbh Method and device for controlling a manipulator
DE112010002245T8 (en) * 2009-06-03 2013-03-14 Mitsubishi Electric Corp. NUMERICAL CONTROL DEVICE AND PRODUCTION SYSTEM
DE102009036013A1 (en) * 2009-08-04 2011-02-17 Weinmann Holzbausystemtechnik Gmbh Method for machining workpieces
JP4676549B2 (en) * 2009-09-10 2011-04-27 ファナック株式会社 Trajectory display device and machine tool provided with the trajectory display device
JP2011096077A (en) * 2009-10-30 2011-05-12 Makino Milling Mach Co Ltd Method and device for generating tool path
US9168946B2 (en) * 2010-03-19 2015-10-27 Javad Gnss, Inc. Method for generating offset paths for ground vehicles
CN102262399A (en) * 2010-05-27 2011-11-30 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 machine motion control system
CN101968641B (en) * 2010-07-08 2012-06-13 西华大学 Error correction system of machine tool XY plane
JP4813616B1 (en) * 2010-07-12 2011-11-09 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device for machine tool having speed control function during arc motion
CN103080859B (en) * 2010-08-25 2015-04-29 三菱电机株式会社 Trajectory control device
CN103189809B (en) * 2010-10-25 2015-11-25 株式会社牧野铣床制作所 The generation method of tool path and generating apparatus
JP5111589B2 (en) * 2010-10-27 2013-01-09 株式会社牧野フライス製作所 Correction method when reversing the feed axis
CN102063089B (en) * 2010-11-26 2012-10-10 吉林大学 Diamond lathing cutter track tracing method
CN102081354B (en) * 2010-12-01 2014-03-26 深圳众为兴技术股份有限公司 Multi-axis motion control interpolation algorithm based on high-speed field bus
US9731735B1 (en) * 2010-12-10 2017-08-15 Cybertran International Inc. System and method of estimating values for commands to cause vehicles to follow a trajectory in a complex track network
US20140297021A1 (en) 2011-02-11 2014-10-02 Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) High speed pocket milling optimisation
US9690282B2 (en) 2011-02-28 2017-06-27 Solidcam Ltd. Computerized tool path generation
US8489224B2 (en) * 2011-02-28 2013-07-16 Solidcam Ltd. Computerized tool path generation
CN102306009B (en) * 2011-04-21 2013-04-24 中国电子科技集团公司第十四研究所 Fitting incremental forming control system and method
US9026242B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2015-05-05 Taktia Llc Automatically guided tools
US9946245B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2018-04-17 Celeritive Technologies, Inc. Non-concentric milling
US20130030759A1 (en) * 2011-07-26 2013-01-31 Hao Ming C Smoothing a time series data set while preserving peak and/or trough data points
US9507454B1 (en) * 2011-09-19 2016-11-29 Parade Technologies, Ltd. Enhanced linearity of gestures on a touch-sensitive surface
JP5266373B2 (en) * 2011-09-26 2013-08-21 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device with tool trajectory display function
CN102566500B (en) * 2011-11-24 2013-09-18 山东理工大学 Straight line segment approximation node-based numerical control system contour error control method
JP5856506B2 (en) * 2012-03-07 2016-02-09 Thk株式会社 Motor control device and magnetic pole position detection method
GB201204908D0 (en) 2012-03-21 2012-05-02 Delcam Plc Method and system for testing a machine tool
US10185304B2 (en) 2012-03-21 2019-01-22 Delcam Limited Timing a machine tool using an accelerometer
US10556356B2 (en) 2012-04-26 2020-02-11 Sharper Tools, Inc. Systems and methods for performing a task on a material, or locating the position of a device relative to the surface of the material
US10022833B2 (en) * 2012-05-03 2018-07-17 Celeritive Technologies, Inc. High performance multi-axis milling
WO2013168251A1 (en) * 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical control device
JP6553508B2 (en) * 2012-06-19 2019-07-31 ディーピー テクノロジー コーポレーション Computer numerical control (CNC) system with CAM function incorporated in CNC controller and method of modifying CNC machine
CN102707666B (en) * 2012-06-29 2014-07-16 沈阳工业大学 Motor-driven XY platform contour processing control device and method based on direction field
CN103853043B (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-02-22 北京配天技术有限公司 Method for realizing synchronous PTP motion in robots and device thereof
US10471666B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2019-11-12 Kanawha Automation, Llc Dynamic additive manufacturing system
JP5845228B2 (en) * 2013-10-23 2016-01-20 ファナック株式会社 Tool path curving device
US9778275B2 (en) 2013-11-06 2017-10-03 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. Confirmed placement of sample tubes in a servo driven automation system using trajectory deviation
EP2884361B1 (en) * 2013-12-12 2022-08-10 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method for operating a movement control system and movement control system operating according to the method and computer program for implementing the method
JP5902753B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2016-04-13 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device with a function of rounding up / cutting in or circular motion
EP2952990B1 (en) * 2014-06-06 2019-02-20 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Optimized control of a chip-producing working machine
US9381643B2 (en) 2014-07-03 2016-07-05 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Dynamical system-based robot velocity control
JP5873144B2 (en) * 2014-07-08 2016-03-01 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device that controls drilling
WO2016024338A1 (en) * 2014-08-12 2016-02-18 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical control device
JP6034835B2 (en) * 2014-08-26 2016-11-30 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device for presenting information for shortening cycle time
US10133246B2 (en) * 2014-09-12 2018-11-20 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Position control device and position control method, optical device, and image pickup apparatus
US9597817B2 (en) 2014-10-15 2017-03-21 Usnr, Llc Electric veneer lathe
JP5911941B1 (en) * 2014-10-16 2016-04-27 ファナック株式会社 Time-series data display device that converts point-sequence data into time-series data of the drive axis and displays it
DE112015004920T5 (en) 2014-10-31 2017-07-13 Cloudbased Industry 4.0 Technologies Ag Computer-implemented method for partial analysis of a workpiece, which is processed by at least one CNC machine
DE212015000254U1 (en) 2014-10-31 2017-06-30 Cloudbased Industry 4.0 Technologies Ag Client device for data acquisition and pre-processing of process-related mass data of at least one CNC machine or an industrial robot
EP3213161B1 (en) 2014-10-31 2022-12-07 Big Data in Manufacturing GmbH Method for optimizing the productivity of a machining process of a cnc machine
DE102014226239A1 (en) 2014-12-17 2016-06-23 Kuka Roboter Gmbh Method for the safe coupling of an input device
JP6062973B2 (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-01-18 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device capable of searching for nearby points in consideration of tool posture
WO2016131022A1 (en) * 2015-02-12 2016-08-18 Glowforge Inc. Cloud controlled laser fabrication
JP6034913B2 (en) 2015-03-30 2016-11-30 ファナック株式会社 Machine tool control apparatus and control method for controlling synchronous operation of main shaft and feed shaft
US9744620B2 (en) * 2015-04-06 2017-08-29 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. Control of processing machines with redundant actuators
US10456883B2 (en) 2015-05-13 2019-10-29 Shaper Tools, Inc. Systems, methods and apparatus for guided tools
JP6659238B2 (en) * 2015-05-28 2020-03-04 ライフロボティクス株式会社 Robot device and stepping motor control device
JP6088581B2 (en) * 2015-06-04 2017-03-01 ファナック株式会社 Machine tool control apparatus and control method for controlling synchronous operation of main shaft and feed shaft
JP6000496B1 (en) * 2015-06-11 2016-09-28 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical controller
WO2016203546A1 (en) * 2015-06-16 2016-12-22 三菱電機株式会社 Command value generating device
CN110039329B (en) 2015-06-22 2022-02-15 伊雷克托科学工业股份有限公司 Multi-spindle machine tool
CN106444637B (en) * 2015-08-04 2019-12-03 深圳市雷赛智能控制股份有限公司 A kind of mini line segment dynamic prediction control method and device
EP3151073A1 (en) * 2015-09-29 2017-04-05 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method and control device for optimized controlling of a machine tool
JP6276234B2 (en) * 2015-10-15 2018-02-07 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device with program check function by override switch
WO2017113195A1 (en) * 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 深圳配天智能技术研究院有限公司 Processing path planning method, processing path planning apparatus and numerically controlled machine tool
US10613516B2 (en) * 2016-04-07 2020-04-07 Willemin-Macodel Sa Method of optimization of machining programs
US10649442B2 (en) 2016-04-25 2020-05-12 The Boeing Company Methods of operating an automated machine for inserting wires into grommet cavity locations of an electrical connector
CN105955194B (en) * 2016-05-10 2018-09-04 大连理工大学 A kind of inflection point smoothing method of discrete machining path
JP6444938B2 (en) * 2016-05-12 2018-12-26 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device equipped with a function for pre-reading machining programs by specifying conditions
US10191463B2 (en) * 2016-07-05 2019-01-29 The Boeing Company Machine system and associated method for optical endpoint control optimization
JP7306986B2 (en) 2016-08-19 2023-07-11 シェイパー ツールズ,インク. Systems, methods and apparatus for sharing toolmaking and design data
CN106406081A (en) * 2016-08-26 2017-02-15 方洋旺 Cruise missile air route second-order smoothing method
EP3293590A1 (en) * 2016-09-13 2018-03-14 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automatic quality evaluation of a sequence of movement commands
WO2018073946A1 (en) * 2016-10-20 2018-04-26 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical control device
JP6374469B2 (en) * 2016-11-16 2018-08-15 ファナック株式会社 Machine tool control apparatus and control method for controlling synchronous operation of main shaft and feed shaft
JP6450734B2 (en) * 2016-11-22 2019-01-09 ファナック株式会社 Numerical controller
TWI607825B (en) * 2016-11-29 2017-12-11 財團法人工業技術研究院 System and method for optimizing machining process of nc program
US10216168B2 (en) * 2016-12-13 2019-02-26 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. Operation aware control of processing machine with redundant actuators
US10392014B2 (en) 2017-02-03 2019-08-27 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Speed controller for a vehicle
EP3602355A1 (en) 2017-03-20 2020-02-05 Solidcam Ltd. Computerized system and method for generating a chatter free milling cnc program for machining a workpiece
US10703367B2 (en) * 2017-05-31 2020-07-07 Nio Usa, Inc. Utilization of smoothing functions for acceleration and deceleration profile generation
CN109213083B (en) * 2017-07-05 2020-05-08 上海狮迈科技有限公司 Ruled surface processing path generation method, device and equipment
JP7024235B2 (en) * 2017-07-19 2022-02-24 オムロン株式会社 Control device, control method of control device, information processing program, and recording medium
JP2019021087A (en) * 2017-07-19 2019-02-07 オムロン株式会社 Control device, method of controlling control device, information processing program, and recording medium
US10514680B2 (en) * 2017-07-31 2019-12-24 General Electric Company System and method for controlling an additive manufacturing system
WO2019050822A1 (en) 2017-09-05 2019-03-14 Covidien Lp Robotic surgical system control arm including dual encoders
US10452070B2 (en) * 2017-09-15 2019-10-22 Uber Technologies, Inc. Context-specific tolerance for motion control in autonomous vehicles
JP6629808B2 (en) * 2017-10-03 2020-01-15 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control unit
JP6592053B2 (en) * 2017-10-11 2019-10-16 ファナック株式会社 Control device for monitoring the moving direction of the work tool
JP6646027B2 (en) * 2017-10-30 2020-02-14 ファナック株式会社 Post-processor device, machining program generation method, CNC machining system, and machining program generation program
JP6740199B2 (en) * 2017-10-30 2020-08-12 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control device, CNC machine tool, numerical control method, and numerical control program
CN111819504B (en) * 2017-12-06 2023-10-10 赫克斯冈技术中心 Systems, methods, and apparatus for tool path virtualization and optimization
ES2963952T3 (en) * 2017-12-26 2024-04-03 Abb Schweiz Ag Robotic machining method and apparatus
US10859389B2 (en) * 2018-01-03 2020-12-08 Wipro Limited Method for generation of a safe navigation path for a vehicle and system thereof
JP6661676B2 (en) * 2018-01-18 2020-03-11 ファナック株式会社 Robot controller
WO2019149953A1 (en) * 2018-02-05 2019-08-08 Create It Real Aps A printer for printing a 3d object
EP3754827A4 (en) * 2018-02-16 2021-03-17 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Control device of power converter
US10860002B2 (en) * 2018-03-19 2020-12-08 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. Receding horizon reference governor
US11169192B2 (en) * 2018-04-23 2021-11-09 The Government Of The United States, As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army Trigonometry dependent plot creation
TWI667559B (en) * 2018-05-11 2019-08-01 國立臺灣科技大學 Automatic surface error compensation method and computer program product therefor
JP6966978B2 (en) * 2018-06-22 2021-11-17 オークマ株式会社 Machine tool motor drive
JP7065721B2 (en) * 2018-07-31 2022-05-12 川崎重工業株式会社 Robot system
JP7037457B2 (en) * 2018-09-05 2022-03-16 オークマ株式会社 Numerical control device and numerical control method
JP2020095316A (en) * 2018-12-10 2020-06-18 ファナック株式会社 Numerical value control unit
JP6966415B2 (en) * 2018-12-26 2021-11-17 ファナック株式会社 Control method, control device and program
EP3690573B1 (en) * 2019-01-30 2021-08-18 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Control of a machine tool
CN109676613B (en) * 2019-02-28 2021-10-12 武汉工程大学 Error-controllable arc transition type smooth track generation method for four-axis industrial robot
JP7222803B2 (en) * 2019-04-25 2023-02-15 株式会社日立製作所 Trajectory planning device, trajectory planning method and program
JP7221900B2 (en) * 2019-05-13 2023-02-14 芝浦機械株式会社 Computer program, workpiece machining method using computer program, and workpiece machining apparatus using computer program
JP7244367B2 (en) * 2019-06-20 2023-03-22 ファナック株式会社 Machining instruction improvement system and machining instruction improvement method
JP2021002194A (en) * 2019-06-21 2021-01-07 ファナック株式会社 Numerical control apparatus, cnc machine tool, numerical control method, and numerical control program
CN110161966B (en) * 2019-07-04 2021-07-23 合肥工业大学 Real-time detection method for multi-axis linkage contour error
EP3994534A4 (en) * 2019-07-05 2023-11-29 Moore Nanotechnology Systems, LLC System and method for correcting machining error during a precision jig grinding process
JP7448322B2 (en) * 2019-09-03 2024-03-12 ファナック株式会社 Tool path correction device
JP7376329B2 (en) * 2019-11-25 2023-11-08 ファナック株式会社 Electric motor control device and electric motor control method
CN110716561A (en) * 2019-11-26 2020-01-21 轻客智能科技(江苏)有限公司 Sweeper forward-looking pose control method and system for trajectory tracking
CN113126607B (en) * 2019-12-31 2024-03-29 深圳市优必选科技股份有限公司 Robot and motion control method and device thereof
CN111331600B (en) * 2020-03-10 2021-04-30 库卡机器人制造(上海)有限公司 Track adjusting method and related equipment
JP6773243B1 (en) * 2020-03-11 2020-10-21 オムロン株式会社 Controls, methods and programs
US11511419B2 (en) 2020-05-01 2022-11-29 Intrinsic Innovation Llc Task planning for measurement variances
CN111958586B (en) * 2020-07-01 2022-04-15 深圳市越疆科技有限公司 Robot speed control method, robot arm type robot, and storage medium
TWI766598B (en) * 2020-11-13 2022-06-01 台達電子工業股份有限公司 Method for planning feedrate of transmission mechanism based on physical constraints of joints
US20240045435A1 (en) * 2020-12-24 2024-02-08 Ocado Innovation Limited Motion Control of a Robotic Load Handling Device
TWI742981B (en) * 2021-01-06 2021-10-11 財團法人工業技術研究院 Method for analyzing overcutting defect of machining path
EP4056331A1 (en) * 2021-03-11 2022-09-14 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Secure operation of multiple-axle kinematic
TWI768830B (en) * 2021-04-15 2022-06-21 財團法人精密機械研究發展中心 Machine tool servo parameter adjustment device and using method
CN114035513A (en) * 2021-09-28 2022-02-11 苏州谋迅智能科技有限公司 S-shaped speed curve look-ahead planning method and device, storage medium and computing device
WO2023058243A1 (en) * 2021-10-08 2023-04-13 ファナック株式会社 Control device and computer-readable recording medium storing program
WO2023073815A1 (en) * 2021-10-26 2023-05-04 ファナック株式会社 Tool path modification device and tool path modification method
CN114296554A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-04-08 合肥工业大学 VR (virtual reality) large-space multi-virtual-target passive touch scheme
CN115234123B (en) * 2022-07-04 2024-02-27 上海默控智能科技有限公司 Control method for automatic window position of fume hood

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE2433003A1 (en) * 1973-07-09 1975-01-30 Kawasaki Heavy Ind Ltd PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM

Family Cites Families (150)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3576979A (en) 1968-09-24 1971-05-04 Allen Bradley Co Motion monitor system
US3838258A (en) 1970-02-10 1974-09-24 Gerber Scientific Instr Co Step motor control system
US3728595A (en) 1970-02-27 1973-04-17 Boeing Co Feedrate control system for milling machines
US3602090A (en) 1970-02-27 1971-08-31 Boeing Co Milling machine control system and milling force sensor therefor
US3679955A (en) 1971-06-07 1972-07-25 Gen Electric Control system for compensating for dimensional errors due to cutting tool wear in an automatic machine tool
US3849712A (en) 1972-06-30 1974-11-19 Ibm Adaptive numerically controlled machine tool responsive to deflection forces on the tool normal to the cutting path
US3882304A (en) 1973-05-04 1975-05-06 Allen Bradley Co Parametric interpolation of three-dimensional surfaces
US3860805A (en) 1973-05-07 1975-01-14 Bendix Corp Method and apparatus for producing a fairing contour in numerical control systems
US4130788A (en) 1973-11-01 1978-12-19 General Automation, Inc. Numerical control servo system
US4477754B1 (en) 1976-07-06 1995-03-21 Hurco Co Inc Interactive machining system
US4131837A (en) 1976-11-10 1978-12-26 The Boeing Company Machine tool monitoring system
US4208718A (en) 1978-06-05 1980-06-17 Kearney & Trecker Corporation Method of optimizing the operation of a computer controlled machine tool
US5825017A (en) 1980-03-27 1998-10-20 Sensor Adaptive Machines Inc. Method and apparatus for determining dimensions
US5871391A (en) * 1980-03-27 1999-02-16 Sensor Adaptive Machine Inc. Apparatus for determining dimensions
JPS5719809A (en) 1980-07-10 1982-02-02 Fanuc Ltd Numerical control information generating system
JPS5769312A (en) 1980-10-13 1982-04-28 Fanuc Ltd Numerical controller incorporating optional block skipping function
JPS5769314A (en) 1980-10-13 1982-04-28 Fanuc Ltd Numerical control system
JPS57113117A (en) 1980-12-30 1982-07-14 Fanuc Ltd Robot control system
DE3113970A1 (en) 1981-04-07 1982-11-04 Dr. Johannes Heidenhain Gmbh, 8225 Traunreut NUMERICAL PATTERN CONTROL FOR A MACHINE TOOL
US4415867A (en) * 1981-05-22 1983-11-15 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Hybrid coupled microstrip amplifier
US4433382A (en) 1981-07-20 1984-02-21 Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Apparatus for automatically adjusting the programmed location of a robot arm
JPS5835607A (en) 1981-08-27 1983-03-02 Fanuc Ltd Numerical controlling system
JPS58155148A (en) 1982-03-05 1983-09-14 Okuma Mach Works Ltd Monitoring system of locus of cutting edge of tool rest in machine tool
US4590573A (en) * 1982-09-17 1986-05-20 Robert Hahn Computer-controlled grinding machine
DE3244307A1 (en) * 1982-11-30 1984-05-30 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München ROBOT CONTROL
JPS60107106A (en) * 1983-11-15 1985-06-12 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Curve interpolation system
JPS60126710A (en) 1983-12-14 1985-07-06 Fanuc Ltd Method for determining working process in automatic programming
US4739488A (en) * 1984-09-21 1988-04-19 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Machine tool with tool selection and work sequence determination
US4633726A (en) * 1984-09-25 1987-01-06 Chang Kuo Chou External hydraulic driving system for motorcycle brake, clutch and gear shift
US4635206A (en) * 1984-10-15 1987-01-06 Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Method and apparatus for oscillating a tool carried by a manipulator
JPS61157909A (en) 1984-12-29 1986-07-17 Fanuc Ltd System for correcting route error of robot
US4663726A (en) 1985-04-15 1987-05-05 General Electric Co. Robot control utilizing cubic spline interpolation
JPS6257852A (en) 1985-09-04 1987-03-13 Toyoda Mach Works Ltd Automatic programming device
JPH0688532B2 (en) 1985-12-27 1994-11-09 曙ブレーキ工業株式会社 Anti-skidding control method
US4763276A (en) * 1986-03-21 1988-08-09 Actel Partnership Methods for refining original robot command signals
JPS62236650A (en) 1986-04-01 1987-10-16 Fanuc Ltd Preparation of nc program for 4-axis lathe
JPH0698554B2 (en) 1986-09-22 1994-12-07 豊田工機株式会社 Numerical control processing equipment
JPH07111646B2 (en) 1987-02-20 1995-11-29 フアナツク株式会社 Part shape input method
JPH0679250B2 (en) 1987-03-19 1994-10-05 フアナツク株式会社 Axis speed output method
JPS63250707A (en) 1987-04-07 1988-10-18 Fanuc Ltd Method for inputting part shape
US4821207A (en) * 1987-04-28 1989-04-11 Ford Motor Company Automated curvilinear path interpolation for industrial robots
US4835710A (en) 1987-07-17 1989-05-30 Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Method of moving and orienting a tool along a curved path
JPS6435605A (en) 1987-07-30 1989-02-06 Fanuc Ltd Numerical controller
US4833617A (en) 1987-08-14 1989-05-23 General Electric Company Solid modeling based adaptive feedrate control for NC machining
JPH01116704A (en) 1987-10-30 1989-05-09 Fanuc Ltd Action control system for industrial robot
JPH01159705A (en) 1987-12-17 1989-06-22 Fanuc Ltd Parts shape inputting method
WO1989006585A1 (en) 1988-01-20 1989-07-27 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Method for preparing offset shape
JPH0652484B2 (en) 1988-02-15 1994-07-06 豊田工機株式会社 Numerical controller for machining non-round workpieces
US5062755A (en) 1988-02-23 1991-11-05 Macmillan Bloedel Limited Articulated arm control
US4947336A (en) 1988-04-15 1990-08-07 Froyd Stanley G Multiple axis motion control system
JPH0683945B2 (en) 1988-07-26 1994-10-26 豊田工機株式会社 Numerical controller for machining non-round workpieces
US5198984A (en) 1988-08-31 1993-03-30 Okuma Corporation Numerical control method for correcting machine tool path errors
US4907164A (en) * 1988-09-26 1990-03-06 General Electric Company Automatically optimized NC tool path generation for machining
EP0384925B1 (en) 1989-02-28 1995-11-22 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Control method for a digital machine tool or a robot
IL89484A (en) 1989-03-03 1992-08-18 Nct Ltd Numerical Control Tech System for automatic finishing of machined parts
US5005135A (en) * 1989-03-22 1991-04-02 Cincinnati Milacron, Inc. Dynamic correction of servo following errors in a computer-numerically controlled system and fixed cycle utilizing same
JPH03157704A (en) 1989-11-16 1991-07-05 Fanuc Ltd Position correcting system for mechanical position fluctuation
JPH03176703A (en) 1989-12-05 1991-07-31 Yoshiaki Kakino Numerical controller
JPH0452805A (en) * 1990-06-15 1992-02-20 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method for generating working locus
GB9013744D0 (en) 1990-06-20 1990-08-08 Renishaw Plc Measurement of a workpiece
JPH0829469B2 (en) 1990-07-03 1996-03-27 株式会社小松製作所 NC processing control device
KR920002268A (en) 1990-07-17 1992-02-28 유끼노리 가까즈 Intelligent Processing Equipment
US5179514A (en) 1990-08-08 1993-01-12 The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York Method and apparatus for trajectory control of robot manipulators or the like
US5247447A (en) 1990-10-31 1993-09-21 The Boeing Company Exception processor system
JP2672395B2 (en) 1990-11-20 1997-11-05 三菱電機株式会社 Machining condition sequence generation method
WO1992015068A1 (en) * 1991-02-15 1992-09-03 Incontrol, Inc. Computer control system for generating geometric designs
AU664372B2 (en) * 1991-06-04 1995-11-16 Anca Pty Ltd Improvements in or relating to computer numerically controlled machines
US5682319A (en) 1991-06-04 1997-10-28 Anca Pty. Ltd. Computer numerically controlled machines
EP0524344B1 (en) 1991-07-26 1996-05-08 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Configurable machine tool control
JP3036143B2 (en) 1991-09-02 2000-04-24 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical control unit
EP0530401B1 (en) 1991-09-06 1996-07-24 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method to start position dependant operations during machining with a robot or machine tool
JP2862036B2 (en) 1991-09-17 1999-02-24 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical control unit
US5339249A (en) 1991-10-29 1994-08-16 Parker Hannifin Corporation Machine control system
JP2800861B2 (en) 1991-11-19 1998-09-21 株式会社 エフ・エーラボ 3D machining method
US5288209A (en) 1991-12-19 1994-02-22 General Electric Company Automatic adaptive sculptured machining
JP2666642B2 (en) 1992-01-28 1997-10-22 三菱電機株式会社 Tool designation method in NC automatic programming system
US5687084A (en) 1992-05-26 1997-11-11 Microcosm, Inc. Satellite orbit maintenance system
US5378091A (en) 1992-06-17 1995-01-03 Makino Milling Machine Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for machining a workpiece
JP3242162B2 (en) * 1992-08-21 2001-12-25 日本板硝子株式会社 NC processing method
US5416716A (en) * 1993-03-30 1995-05-16 Gerber Garment Technology, Inc. Contour builder
US5402367A (en) * 1993-07-19 1995-03-28 Texas Instruments, Incorporated Apparatus and method for model based process control
US5453933A (en) 1993-09-08 1995-09-26 Hurco Companies, Inc. CNC control system
US5508596A (en) 1993-10-07 1996-04-16 Omax Corporation Motion control with precomputation
US5917726A (en) * 1993-11-18 1999-06-29 Sensor Adaptive Machines, Inc. Intelligent machining and manufacturing
US5375064A (en) 1993-12-02 1994-12-20 Hughes Aircraft Company Method and apparatus for moving a material removal tool with low tool accelerations
JP3512091B2 (en) * 1994-04-28 2004-03-29 ソニー株式会社 Free-form surface creation method and free-form surface creation device
JP3171298B2 (en) 1994-09-29 2001-05-28 キタムラ機械株式会社 Numerically controlled machine tools
US5548195A (en) * 1994-12-22 1996-08-20 International Business Machines Corporation Compensated servo control stage positioning apparatus
US5668459A (en) 1995-05-09 1997-09-16 Lg Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. Apparatus for generating magnetic flux of induction motor
JP3702496B2 (en) 1995-07-10 2005-10-05 三菱電機株式会社 Machining method using numerical controller
JP3506814B2 (en) 1995-07-11 2004-03-15 東芝機械株式会社 Numerical control unit
JP3396342B2 (en) * 1995-07-17 2003-04-14 三菱電機株式会社 Numerical controller with spline interpolation function
US5919012A (en) * 1995-09-28 1999-07-06 The Institute Of Physical And Chemical Research (Riken) Method of high speed cutting mold and ultra-high speed milling machine
US5946449A (en) 1996-04-05 1999-08-31 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Precision apparatus with non-rigid, imprecise structure, and method for operating same
DE69637808D1 (en) 1996-11-07 2009-02-26 Mori Seiki Seisakusho Yamatoko METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ANALYZING AN NC PROGRAM FOR NC PROCESSING
EP0879674B1 (en) 1996-11-07 2003-04-02 Mitutoyo Corporation Generation of measurement program in nc machining and machining management based on the measurement program
CA2255915A1 (en) 1997-03-15 1998-09-24 Makino Milling Machine Co., Ltd. Machining processor
US6317646B1 (en) 1997-03-19 2001-11-13 Fadal Machining Centers, Inc. CNC machine having interactive control of corner tolerance that is programmed to vary with the corner angle
US5828574A (en) 1997-05-19 1998-10-27 General Electric Company Adaptive feedrates from geometry modeling for NC machining
US6052628A (en) 1997-08-08 2000-04-18 Hong; Jaiwei Method and system for continuous motion digital probe routing
JPH11126106A (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-05-11 Okuma Corp Numerically controlled machine tool
US6019554A (en) 1997-10-31 2000-02-01 Hong; Jiawei Method and system for computer assisted manual machine tool control
US5991528A (en) 1997-11-05 1999-11-23 Reliance Electric Industrial Company Expert manufacturing system
JPH11149306A (en) * 1997-11-14 1999-06-02 Fanuc Ltd Controller for finishing machine
US5932132A (en) * 1997-11-19 1999-08-03 Engineering & Research Associates, Inc. Sterile connector apparatus and method
US6135857A (en) 1998-03-02 2000-10-24 General Electric Company Method for surface enhancement by fluid jet impact
US6064168A (en) 1998-03-13 2000-05-16 Fanuc Robotics North America, Inc. Method of controlling robot movement
US6310621B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2001-10-30 Avid Technology, Inc. Extended support for numerical controls
DE19821557A1 (en) 1998-05-14 1999-11-18 Heidenhain Gmbh Dr Johannes Non linear representation of NC machining paths, for NC machine tools and robots
US6242880B1 (en) * 1998-09-08 2001-06-05 Cimplus, Inc. Tolerance based motion control system
DE19841716A1 (en) 1998-09-11 2000-03-16 Siemens Ag Movement guidance control for industrial processing machine
JP2000084794A (en) 1998-09-14 2000-03-28 Makino Milling Mach Co Ltd Machining device
DE19856098C2 (en) * 1998-12-04 2002-01-17 Agie Sa Method and device for controlling a die sinking EDM machine
US6470225B1 (en) 1999-04-16 2002-10-22 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatically tuning feedforward parameters
US6850806B2 (en) 1999-04-16 2005-02-01 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining calibration options in a motion control system
US6330483B1 (en) 1999-05-07 2001-12-11 The Boeing Company Optimal control system
US6671571B1 (en) 1999-07-05 2003-12-30 Mitutoyo Corporation Method for NC- programming and system for NC- machining
US6350222B2 (en) * 1999-07-28 2002-02-26 Thermwood Corporation Machine tool with improved tool changer means
WO2001018622A1 (en) 1999-09-08 2001-03-15 Johannes Heidenhain Gmbh Method and circuitry for producing nominal position values for a closed loop position control of a numerically continuous-path controlled machine
US6675061B2 (en) * 2001-02-26 2004-01-06 Hitachi, Ltd. Numerically controlled curved surface machining unit
JP3610485B2 (en) * 1999-09-20 2005-01-12 株式会社日立製作所 Numerically controlled curved surface processing equipment
US6368879B1 (en) 1999-09-22 2002-04-09 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Process control with control signal derived from metrology of a repetitive critical dimension feature of a test structure on the work piece
DE19949558A1 (en) 1999-10-14 2001-04-19 Heidenhain Gmbh Dr Johannes Control program for a numerical machine tool with a reusable software structure
US6922606B1 (en) * 1999-11-19 2005-07-26 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Apparatus and method for smooth cornering in a motion control system
US6782306B2 (en) 1999-12-16 2004-08-24 Siemens Energy & Automation Motion control system and method utilizing spline interpolation
JP2002172543A (en) 2000-09-29 2002-06-18 Toyoda Mach Works Ltd Control parameter setting system and control parameter setting method for machining device
WO2002034463A1 (en) 2000-10-26 2002-05-02 Citizen Watch Co., Ltd. Method and device for automatically preparing processing program
JP2002189510A (en) 2000-12-22 2002-07-05 Mori Seiki Co Ltd Working relevant information preparation device and numerical controller equipped with the same device
US6865499B2 (en) 2001-04-26 2005-03-08 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Method and apparatus for tuning compensation parameters in a motion control system associated with a mechanical member
JP2003000258A (en) * 2001-06-13 2003-01-07 Inst Of Physical & Chemical Res Method for evaluating sensitivity to drug
AU2002322504A1 (en) 2001-07-13 2003-01-29 Broks Automation, Inc. Trajectory planning and motion control strategies for a planar three-degree-of-freedom robotic arm
US6704611B2 (en) * 2001-08-21 2004-03-09 Surfware, Inc. System and method for rough milling
JP4751017B2 (en) * 2001-08-23 2011-08-17 エフ・イ−・アイ・カンパニー A method for controlling a system and a computer readable medium comprising instructions for performing the steps of the method
US6766216B2 (en) 2001-08-27 2004-07-20 Flow International Corporation Method and system for automated software control of waterjet orientation parameters
US6879874B2 (en) 2001-09-03 2005-04-12 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Evaluating excessive tolerances in NC parts programs
DE60115053T2 (en) * 2001-09-05 2006-08-03 Mikron Comp-Tec Ag Method and system for user support for editing parameter setting
DE10144487A1 (en) 2001-09-10 2003-03-27 Heidenhain Gmbh Dr Johannes Track control for a CNC type machine tool, where a unique tolerance does not have to be set in the sub-program for each corner
US7310567B2 (en) 2001-09-12 2007-12-18 Rexroth Indramat Gmbh Method for the preparation, treatment and updating tool data
DE10149175A1 (en) 2001-10-04 2003-04-17 Heidenhain Gmbh Dr Johannes Tracking control for machine tool, includes program segment for velocity control applied separately to linear- and angular axes
DE60230009D1 (en) * 2001-10-16 2009-01-08 Fanuc Ltd Numerical control
KR100434025B1 (en) * 2001-12-31 2004-06-04 학교법인 포항공과대학교 Method for automatically generating part program for use in step-nc
JP3628672B2 (en) * 2002-06-11 2005-03-16 川崎重工業株式会社 Curve interpolation by arc
US6604677B1 (en) * 2003-02-06 2003-08-12 Riverwood International Corporation Carton with top dispensing feature
US8417370B2 (en) 2003-10-17 2013-04-09 Hexagon Metrology Ab Apparatus and method for dimensional metrology
KR100517880B1 (en) * 2003-11-20 2005-09-28 학교법인 포항공과대학교 Off-line feed rate scheduling for reduction of machining time and enhancement of machining accuracy in cnc machining
DE10357650B4 (en) 2003-12-10 2019-04-25 Dr. Johannes Heidenhain Gmbh Method for smoothing polygons in NC programs
US9681925B2 (en) 2004-04-21 2017-06-20 Siemens Medical Solutions Usa, Inc. Method for augmented reality instrument placement using an image based navigation system
US7451013B2 (en) * 2004-04-29 2008-11-11 Surfware, Inc. Engagement milling
US7630793B2 (en) * 2004-12-10 2009-12-08 Caterpillar S.A.R.L. Method of altering operation of work machine based on work tool performance footprint to maintain desired relationship between operational characteristics of work tool and work machine
CA2747118C (en) 2005-03-23 2015-02-10 Hurco Companies, Inc. Method of curvature controlled data smoothing

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE2433003A1 (en) * 1973-07-09 1975-01-30 Kawasaki Heavy Ind Ltd PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1869531B1 (en) 2020-04-22
CA2601886C (en) 2013-03-19
SG160423A1 (en) 2010-04-29
US7792604B2 (en) 2010-09-07
WO2006102517A2 (en) 2006-09-28
US7693588B2 (en) 2010-04-06
CA2747118C (en) 2015-02-10
SG173407A1 (en) 2011-08-29
CA2747118A1 (en) 2006-09-28
CA2747239C (en) 2016-02-23
US20070046677A1 (en) 2007-03-01
CA2601886A1 (en) 2006-09-28
US7450127B2 (en) 2008-11-11
CA2747239A1 (en) 2006-09-28
JP2010511919A (en) 2010-04-15
CN101180591A (en) 2008-05-14
US20070091094A1 (en) 2007-04-26
US20070085850A1 (en) 2007-04-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20070085850A1 (en) Method of curvature controlled data smoothing
USRE39907E1 (en) Tolerance based motion control system
Sencer et al. Feed optimization for five-axis CNC machine tools with drive constraints
Koren Control of machine tools
Lin Real-time surface interpolator for 3-D parametric surface machining on 3-axis machine tools
Yong et al. A parametric interpolator with confined chord errors, acceleration and deceleration for NC machining
Lam et al. Model predictive contouring control for biaxial systems
US5953233A (en) Process of generating discrete points defining cutter path, so as to meet selected workpiece machining requirements
US7348748B2 (en) Motorized system and method of control
CN109725600B (en) Post-processor device, machining program generating method, CNC machining system, and computer-readable information recording medium
Park et al. Development of a real-time trajectory generator for NURBS interpolation based on the two-stage interpolation method
Zhong et al. A linear cross-coupled control system for high-speed machining
US5412300A (en) Numerical control device and method for control of movement of a tool
Lin et al. Real-time interpolators for multi-axis CNC machine tools
Sekar et al. Design of jerk bounded feedrate with ripple effect for adaptive nurbs interpolator
Siu Real time trajectory generation and interpolation
Imani et al. High-speed contouring enhanced with PH curves
Lin et al. Ruled surface machining on five-axis CNC machine tools
Brecher et al. Command Variable Generation and Interpolation
Zarifmansour et al. Considering machining tolerances in high speed corner tracking
US11402821B2 (en) Method for ascertaining a rough trajectory from a specified contour
WO2022138843A9 (en) Numerical control device
Sencer Smooth trajectory generation and precision control of 5-axis CNC machine tools
CN112114558A (en) Numerical controller, CNC machine tool, numerical control method, and computer-readable medium containing program for numerical control
Yeung A three-axis virtual computer numerical-controlled (CNC) system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20071023

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR

DAX Request for extension of the european patent (deleted)
17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20141008

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R079

Ref document number: 602006059346

Country of ref document: DE

Free format text: PREVIOUS MAIN CLASS: G05B0019410000

Ipc: G05B0019416000

GRAP Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: G05B 19/416 20060101AFI20191031BHEP

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED

INTG Intention to grant announced

Effective date: 20191205

GRAS Grant fee paid

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3

GRAA (expected) grant

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R081

Ref document number: 602006059346

Country of ref document: DE

Owner name: HURCO COMPANIES, INC., INDIANAPOLIS, US

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: HURCO COMPANIES, INC., INDIANAPOLIS, IND., US

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: B1

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: GB

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: EP

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: IE

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R096

Ref document number: 602006059346

Country of ref document: DE

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: REF

Ref document number: 1260956

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20200515

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: LT

Ref legal event code: MG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: NL

Ref legal event code: MP

Effective date: 20200422

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: FI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: IS

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200822

Ref country code: SE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: GR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200723

Ref country code: NL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: PT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200824

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: MK05

Ref document number: 1260956

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20200422

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LV

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: BG

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200722

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R097

Ref document number: 602006059346

Country of ref document: DE

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: EE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: AT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: DK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: ES

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: CZ

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: RO

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

Ref country code: PL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

PLBE No opposition filed within time limit

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT

26N No opposition filed

Effective date: 20210125

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: MC

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: PL

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: BE

Ref legal event code: MM

Effective date: 20210331

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: CH

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20210331

Ref country code: LI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20210331

Ref country code: LU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20210323

Ref country code: IE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20210323

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: BE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20210331

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: FR

Payment date: 20230208

Year of fee payment: 18

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: HU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT; INVALID AB INITIO

Effective date: 20060323

Ref country code: CY

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20200422

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IT

Payment date: 20230213

Year of fee payment: 18

Ref country code: GB

Payment date: 20230202

Year of fee payment: 18

Ref country code: DE

Payment date: 20230125

Year of fee payment: 18